Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (2024)

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (1)

Introduction 4

Instrument Cluster 10

Warning lights and chimes 10Gauges 15

Entertainment Systems 18

AM/FM stereo 18AM/FM stereo with CD 20AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 23AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 28

Climate Controls 34

Manual heating and air conditioning 34Automatic temperature control 35Rear window defroster 37

Lights 38

Headlamps 38Turn signal control 42Bulb replacement 44

Driver Controls 50

Windshield wiper/washer control 50Steering wheel adjustment 51Power windows 62Mirrors 63Speed control 65Moon roof 69Message center 74

Locks and Security 84

Keys 84Locks 84Anti-theft system 92

Table of Contents

1

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (2)

Seating and Safety Restraints 100

Seating 100Safety restraints 105Airbags 120Child restraints 132

Tires, Wheels and Loading 143

Tire information 143Tire inflation 145Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 158Vehicle loading 163Trailer towing 169Recreational towing 172

Driving 173

Starting 173Brakes 178Traction Control™ 181Air suspension 184Transmission operation 185

Roadside Emergencies 191

Getting roadside assistance 191Hazard flasher switch 192Fuel pump shut-off switch 193Fuses and relays 194Changing tires 201Lug nut torque 207Jump starting 208Wrecker towing 214

Customer Assistance 215

Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 221Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 222

Cleaning 223

Table of Contents

2

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (3)

Maintenance and Specifications 230

Engine compartment 232Engine oil 234Battery 237Engine coolant 239Fuel information 245Air filter(s) 261Part numbers 262Maintenance product specifications and capacities 263Engine data 266

Accessories 269

Index 271

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanicalincluding photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrievalsystem or translation in whole or part is not permitted without writtenauthorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Copyright © 2007 Ford Motor Company

Table of Contents

3

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (4)

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles andcertain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE MATERIALCertain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat beltpretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

CONGRATULATIONSCongratulations on acquiring your new Mercury. Please take the time toget well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. Themore you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater thesafety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit thefollowing website:• In the United States: www.ford.com• In Canada: www.ford.ca• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx• In Australia: www.ford.com.auAdditional owner information is given in separate publications.This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant availableand therefore some of the items covered may not apply to yourparticular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describeoptions before they are generally available.Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. Itis an integral part of the vehicle.

Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident thesafety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the

engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pumpshut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

4

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (5)

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? Inthis guide, answers to such questions are contained in commentshighlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should beread and observed.

Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it isimperative that you consult therelevant section of this guide beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.

Protecting the environmentWe must all play our part inprotecting the environment. Correctvehicle usage and the authorizeddisposal of waste, cleaning andlubrication materials are significantsteps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in thisguide with the tree symbol.

BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLEYour vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drivecontinuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofnew vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give themoving parts a chance to break in.

Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing atrailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer toTrailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils sincethese additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in theMaintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oilusage.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

5

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (6)

SPECIAL NOTICES

New Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered byyour vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the WarrantyGuide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.

Special instructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electroniccontrols.

Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system(SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to

follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.

Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats shouldNEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.

Service Data RecordingService data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting andstoring diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentiallyincludes information about the performance or status of various systemsand modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brakesystems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, FordMotor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities mayaccess vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to yourvehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

Event Data RecordingOther modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable ofcollecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. Therecorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.The modules may record information about both the vehicle and theoccupants, potentially including information such as:• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the

brake pedal;• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

6

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (7)

To access this information, special equipment must be directly connectedto the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada donot access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawfulauthority. Other parties may seek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.

Cell phone useThe use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasinglyimportant in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when usingsuch equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safetyand security when appropriately used, particularly in emergencysituations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communicationsequipment to avoid negating these benefits.

Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellularphones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communicationssystems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use

extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus offthe road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation oftheir vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not essential tothe driving task when it is safe to do so.

Export unique (Non–United States/Canada) vehicle specificinformationFor your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped withfeatures and options that are different from the ones that are describedin this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may be suppliedthat complements this book. By referring to the market uniquesupplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. ThisOwner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units builtfor Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

7

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (8)

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front

Airbag - SideChild Seat LowerAnchor

Child Seat TetherAnchor

Brake System

Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System

Brake Fluid -Non-Petroleum Based

Parking Aid System

Stability Control System Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

WindshieldDefrost/Demist

Rear WindowDefrost/Demist

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

8

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (9)

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power WindowsFront/Rear

Power Window Lockout

Child Safety DoorLock/Unlock

Interior LuggageCompartment Release

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Engine CoolantEngine CoolantTemperature

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,or Sparks

Battery Acid

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

Power Steering FluidMaintain Correct FluidLevel

MAX

MIN

Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter

Passenger CompartmentAir Filter

Jack

Check Fuel CapLow Tire PressureWarning

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Introduction

9

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (10)

WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Standard instrument cluster

Optional instrument cluster

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that maybecome serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light mayilluminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure thebulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to therespective system warning light for additional information.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

10

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (11)

Service Engine Soon: The ServiceEngine Soon indicator lightilluminates when the ignition is firstturned to the ON position to checkthe bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready forInspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the �Service engine soon�light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if nomalfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the �Serviceengine soon� light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is notready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On BoardDiagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to Onboard diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specificationschapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which coulddamage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoidheavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle servicedimmediately by your authorized dealer.

Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperaturescould damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior

floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

Powertrain malfunctionindicator (if equipped):Illuminates when a powertrain faulthas been detected. Contact yourauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

Check fuel cap (if equipped):Illuminates when the fuel cap maynot be properly installed. Continueddriving with this light on may causethe Service engine soon warninglight to come on. Refer to Fuelfiller cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

11

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (12)

Brake system warning light: Toconfirm the brake system warninglight is functional, it willmomentarily illuminate when theignition is turned to the ON positionwhen the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ONposition. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at thistime, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illuminationafter releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and thebrake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.

Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on isdangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may

occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehiclechecked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended distances withthe parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk ofpersonal injury.

Anti-lock brake system: If theABS light stays illuminated orcontinues to flash, a malfunction hasbeen detected, have the systemserviced immediately by yourauthorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brakewarning light also is illuminated.

Airbag readiness: If this light failsto illuminate when the ignition isturned to ON, continues to flash orremains on, have the systemserviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also soundwhen a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has beendetected.

Safety belt: Reminds you to fastenyour safety belt. A Belt-Minder�chime will also sound to remind youto fasten your safety belt. Refer tothe Seating and safety restraintschapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder� chime feature.

P!BRAKE

ABS

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

12

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (13)

Charging system: Illuminates whenthe battery is not charging properly.

Engine oil pressure: Illuminateswhen the oil pressure falls below thenormal range. Check the oil leveland add oil if needed. Refer toEngine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Engine coolant temperature (ifequipped): Illuminates when theengine coolant temperature is high.Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool.Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specificationschapter.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine isrunning or hot.

Traction control™ AdvanceTrac�active (if equipped): Illuminateswhen the Traction control™ systemis active. It will be lit for a minimumof four seconds or for the durationof the Traction Control™ event,refer to the Driving chapter for more information.

Severity indicator (if equipped):Displays the indicated severity colorwhen any of the following warningconditions has occurred:

• Red: Low Oil Pressure, ChargeSystem, Engine Coolant Over Temperature, Door Ajar

• Amber: Low FuelRefer to Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter.

Low tire pressure warning (ifequipped): Illuminates when yourtire pressure is low. If the lightremains ON at start up or whiledriving, the tire pressure should bechecked. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels andLoading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

13

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (14)

illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light doesnot turn ON, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. Formore information on this system, refer to Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

Air suspension (if equipped):Illuminates when the air suspensionis turned OFF, the load limit isexceeded or the air suspensionsystem requires servicing.

Low fuel (if equipped):Illuminates when the fuel level inthe fuel tank is at or near empty(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapterfor more information).

O/D off: Illuminates when theoverdrive function of thetransmission has been turned OFF,refer to the Driving chapter. If thelight does not illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damagemay occur.

Speed control (if equipped):Illuminates when the speed controlis activated. Turns off when thespeed control system is deactivated.

Door ajar (if equipped):Illuminates when one of the doors isnot completely shut and the ignitionis turned to ON. With the ignition inRUN position, a tone will sound for one second (if a door is open).

Turn signal: Illuminates when theleft or right turn signal or thehazard lights are turned on. If theindicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.

High beams: Illuminates when thehigh beam headlamps are turned on.

O/DOFF

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

14

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (15)

Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parkinglamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and thedriver’s door is opened.

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in theignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s dooris opened.

GAUGES

Speedometer: Indicates thecurrent vehicle speed.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge: Indicates engine coolanttemperature. At normal operatingtemperature, the needle will be inthe normal range (between “H” and“C”). If it enters the red section,the engine is overheating. Stopthe vehicle as soon as safelypossible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

15

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (16)

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine isrunning or hot.

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.

• Without Message Center

To switch the display from Metric toEnglish, press and hold the buttonon the cluster for three seconds.

• With Message Center

Refer to Message Center in theDriver Controls chapter on how toswitch the display from Metric toEnglish and the odometer to thespeedometer.

Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.

• Without Message Center

Press and release the button on thecluster to toggle between odometerand trip odometer display. To reset,press the button again until the tripreading is 000000.0 miles.

• With Message Center

Press and release the messagecenter INFO button until “TRIP”appears in the display (thisrepresents the trip mode). Press thecontrol again to select Trip A andTrip B features. Press and hold theRESET button for two seconds toreset.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

16

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (17)

Tachometer: Indicates the enginespeed in revolutions per minute.Driving with your tachometerpointer continuously at the top ofthe scale may damage the engine.

Fuel gauge: Indicatesapproximately how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank (when the ignitionis in the ON position). The fuelgauge may vary slightly when thevehicle is in motion or on a grade.

The arrow near the fuel pump iconindicates which side of the vehiclethe fuel filler door is located.

Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specificationschapter for more information.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster

17

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (18)

AUDIO SYSTEMS

AM/FM stereo (if equipped)

1. Seek: Press / to find thenext strong station down/up thefrequency band.

2. Tune: Press / to manuallychange radio frequency down/up.

3. AM/FM: Press to choose afrequency band in radio mode.

4. Memory preset buttons: To seta station: Select frequency bandAM/FM; tune to a station, press andhold a preset button until sound returns.

1 2 3 4 AM/FM

SEEKTONE

CLK TUNE

TONE VOL

12

FMST DX

VOLPUSH

ON

5

3

6 7

4

1 2

AM/FM

1 2 3 4

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

18

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (19)

5. Power/volume: Press to turnON/OFF; turn to increase ordecrease volume levels.

6. Tone: Press TONE until thedesired level — Bass, Treble, Fadeappears on the display. Turn thevolume control to raise/lower thelevels, or to move the audio soundfrom the right to left or the front toback (if equipped).

7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,press and hold CLK until CLOCKSET appears in the display.Continue to hold CLK as you pressSEEK to decrease orincrease the hours.

To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in thedisplay. Continue to hold CLK as you press TUNE to decrease orincrease the minutes.

TONE

CLK

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

19

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (20)

AM/FM Stereo Single CD Premium audio system (if equipped)

1. CD slot: Insert a CD, label sideup. With the ignition on, the radiowill begin play when a CD isinserted. If the ignition is off, press CD prior to inserting a disc. Do notforce a disc into the system as damage could result.

2. SEEK: Press to access the next( ) or previous ( ) radiostation or CD track. Press and holdto advance/reverse in the current CD track.

3. TUNE: Press to manually go up( ) or down ( ) the radiofrequency.

4. MUTE: Press to mute the playingmedia. Press again to return to theplaying media or turn the volumecontrol to adjust the volume.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

20

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (21)

5. Eject: Press to eject the CD. Ifthe disc is not removed within theallotted time, the system willautomatically reload the CD and begin play. Note: The eject function willwork when the ignition is turned off.

6. BASS: Press BASS; thenpress SEL todecrease/increase the level of bassoutput.

TREB (Treble): Press TREB; thenpress SEL todecrease/increase the level of trebleoutput.

7. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; thenpress SEL to shift sound tothe left/right speakers.

FADE: Press FADE; then press SEL to shift sound to therear/front speakers.

8. SEL: Use with Bass, Treble,Balance, Fade and other menufunctions.

9. MENU: Press MENU to accessthe following functions:

Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a moreconsistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU untilcompression status is displayed. Press SEL to enable thecompression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press SELagain to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed. Whenactivated, the compression icon will appear in the display.

Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations withoutlosing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. PressMENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL totoggle ON/OFF. When the six strongest stations are filled, the stationstored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strongstations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.

TREB

BASS

SEL+

FADE

BAL

SEL+

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

21

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (22)

When activated, AUTOSET will momentarily appear in the display whenany of the preset controls are pressed.

Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically andslightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 isthe maximum setting.Press MENU to access and use SEL to adjust the volume setting.The level will appear in the display.

Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINSis displayed. Press SEL to manually decrease/increase thehours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.

Note: The menu selections will remain in the display for approximately10 seconds, at which time the display will return to the previous mode.You may also exit the menu options by pressing any other audio control.

10. Memory presets: To set astation: Select frequency band, tuneto a station, press and hold a presetbutton until sound returns.

11. On/Off/Volume: Push to turnon/off; turn to adjust the volumelevels.Note: With the ignition turned off,you may press the volume control tomomentarily view the clock.

12. CD: Press to enter CD mode if a CD is already present in the system.In radio mode, the CD icon will appear in the display if a CD is loadedinto the system.

13. AM: Press to select the AMfrequency.

14. FM: Press to select the FMfrequency. Press repeatedly totoggle between FM1 and FM2.

15. SHUF (Shuffle): Press to playall tracks on the current CD inrandom order. Press again to stop.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

22

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (23)

16. SCAN: Press SCAN to hear abrief sampling of radio stations orCD tracks. Press again to stop.

Premium/Audiophile Satellite Compatible AM/FM Stereo SingleCD/Cassette system (if equipped)

1. CD slot: Insert a CD, label sideup. With the ignition on, the radiowill begin to play a CD onceinserted. With the ignition off, the CD control must be pressed beforeinserting the disc. Failure may result in damage to the CD and/or audiosystem.

2. CD eject: Press to eject a CD. Ifthe disc is not removed within theallotted time, the system willautomatically reload the CD and begin play. Note: The eject function willwork when the ignition is turned off.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

23

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (24)

3. BASS: Press BASS; thenpress SEL-TEXT todecrease/increase the level of bassoutput.

TREB (Treble): Press TREB; thenpress SEL-TEXT todecrease/increase the level of trebleoutput.

4. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; thenpress SEL-TEXT to shiftsound to the left/right speakers.

FADE: Press FADE; thenpress SEL-TEXT to shiftsound to the rear/front speakers.

5. Phone/mute: Press to mute theplaying media. Press again to returnto the playing media or turn thevolume control to adjust the volume.

6. SEL/TEXT: Use with Bass,Treble, Balance, Fade and othermenu functions.

TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. YourAudiophile radio may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kitto enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. DetailedSatellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Checkwith your authorized dealer for availability.

7. MENU: Press MENU repeatedlyto access RDS on/off. Press

SEL-TEXT to toggle RDSon/off. Press MENU again to access Program type mode or ShowType/Name mode. (MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceedto the next RDS mode.)

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radioand Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radiobroadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio

TREB

BASS

SEL-TEXT+

TREB

BASS

SEL-TEXT+

FADE

BAL

SEL-TEXT+

FADE

BAL

SEL-TEXT+

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

24

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (25)

stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDStechnology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for acertain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.With RDS ON, press MENU until the program type menu is displayed.One of the various program types will appear. Press SEL-TEXTto scroll through music types. Press SEEK or SCAN to search for astation playing the requested music category.Show TYPE: Selects between displaying the station’s call letters ormusic format when RDS is enabled. Press and hold MENU until SHOWXX appears in the display. Press SEL-TEXT to select NAME orTYPE.

Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a moreconsistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU repeatedly untilcompression status is displayed. Press SEL-TEXT control toenable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed.Press SEL-TEXT control again to disable the feature whenCOMPRESS ON is displayed. When activated, the compression icon willappear in the display.

Occupancy mode (Available only on Audiophile audios): Press MENUrepeatedly until occupancy mode appears in the display.Press SEL-TEXT to select ALL, DRIVER or REAR SEAToccupancy mode.

Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations withoutlosing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. PressMENU repeatedly until AUTOSET appears in the display. PressSEL-TEXT to toggle ON/OFF. When the six strongest stations arefilled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are lessthan six strong stations, the system will store the last one in theremaining presets. When activated, AUTOSET will momentarily appear inthe display when any of the preset controls are pressed.

Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically andslightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 isthe maximum setting.Press MENU repeatedly to access and use SEL/TEXT to adjustthe volume setting. The level will appear in the display.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

25

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (26)

Dolby: Works in tape mode to reduces tape noise and hiss. Press MENUuntil DOLBY XX appears in the display. Press SEL-TEXT totoggle ON/OFF.The Dolby� noise reduction system is manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby� and the double-Dsymbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

Setting the clock: Press MENU repeatedly until SELECT HOUR orSELECT MINS is displayed. Press SEL-TEXT to manuallydecrease/increase the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengageclock mode.

Note: The menu selections will remain in the display for approximately10 seconds, at which time the display will return to the previous mode.You may also exit the menu options by pressing any other audio control.

8. Cassette: Insert a cassette facing to the right.

9. TUNE: Press to manually go upor down the radio frequency.

CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Yoursystem may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enableSatellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satelliteinstructions are included with the dealer installed kit.Check with your authorized dealer for availability.

10. Side 1–2: Press to access thenext side of the cassette tape. Thedisplay will indicate whether TAPE1 or TAPE 2 is playing.

11. SEEK: Press to access thenext/previous radio station, tapeselection or CD track.

12. REW (Rewind): Press torewind in tape or CD mode.

FF (Fast forward): Press to fastforward in tape or CD mode.

REW FF

3 4

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

26

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (27)

13. SCAN: Press SCAN to hear abrief sampling of radio stations,selections or CD tracks. Press againto stop.

14. SHUF (Shuffle): Press to playthe tracks on the current CD inrandom order. Press again to stop.

15. Memory presets: To set astation: Select frequency band, tuneto a station, press and hold a presetbutton until sound returns.

16. AM/FM: Press to togglebetween AM/FM1/FM2 modes.

17. Tape eject: Press to eject thetape.

18. CD/TAPE: Press to togglebetween CD and TAPE mode. Inradio and tape mode, the CD iconwill appear in the display if a CD is loaded into the system.

19. SAT: Your system may beequipped with Satellite Readycapability. The kit to enable theSatellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satelliteinstructions are included with the dealer installed kit.Check with your authorized dealer for availability.

20. On/Off/Volume: Push to turnon/off; turn to adjust the volumelevels. Note: With the ignitionturned off, you may press thevolume control to momentarily viewthe clock.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

27

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (28)

Audiophile AM/FM Satellite Compatible Stereo In-dash Six CDsound system (if equipped)

1. CD slot: To insert a CD, pressLOAD. When the system is ready,insert a CD, label side up.

2. SEEK: Press to access thenext/previous radio station or CDtrack. Press and hold toadvance/reverse in the current CD track.

3. TUNE/CAT: Press to manually goup or down the radio frequency.

TEXT is only available whenequipped with Satellite radio. Your system may be equipped withSatellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite reception is availablethrough your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions are included with thedealer installed kit. Check with your authorized dealer foravailability.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

28

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (29)

4. MUTE: Press to mute the playingmedia. Press again to return to theplaying media or turn the volumecontrol to adjust the volume.

5. Eject: Press to eject CD(s) whenthe ignition is on or off. Numberswill illuminate in the displayindicating which CD slots are loaded with CDs. To eject a specific CD,press eject and the corresponding preset number. If no preset isselected, the system will eject the currently selected CD. Press and holdto eject all loaded discs.

Note: If the CD is not removed within 15 seconds, the system will reloadthe disc and begin play if the system is on.

6. BASS: Press BASS; thenpress SEL-TEXT todecrease/increase the level of bassoutput.

TREB (Treble): Press TREB; thenpress SEL-TEXT todecrease/increase the level of trebleoutput.

7. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; thenpress SEL-TEXT to shiftsound to the left/right speakers.

FADE: Press FADE; then pressSEL-TEXT to shift sound to

the rear/front speakers.

8. SEL-TEXT: Use with Bass,Treble, Balance, Fade and othermenu functions.

TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Yoursystem may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enableSatellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satelliteinstructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check with yourauthorized dealer for availability.

TREB

BASS

SEL-TEXT+

TREB

BASS

SEL-TEXT+

FADE

BAL

SEL-TEXT+

FADE

BAL

SEL-TEXT+

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

29

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (30)

9. MENU: Press MENU repeatedlyto access RDS on/off.Use SEL-TEXT to toggleRDS on/off. Press MENU again to access Program type mode or ShowType mode. (MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed tothe next RDS mode.)

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radioand Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radiobroadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radiostations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDStechnology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.

FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for acertain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.With RDS ON, press MENU until the program type menu is displayed.One of the various program types will appear. Press SEL-TEXTto scroll through music types. Press SEEK or SCAN to search for astation playing the requested music category.

Show TYPE: Selects between displaying the station’s call letters ormusic format when RDS is enabled. Press MENU until SHOW XX appearsin the display. Press to select NAME or TYPE.

Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a moreconsistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU untilcompression status is displayed. Press SEL-TEXT to enable thecompression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SELcontrol again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.When activated, the compression icon will illuminate in the display.

Occupancy mode (Available on Audiophile audios only): Press MENUuntil occupancy mode appears in the display. Press SEL-TEXT toselect ALL, DRIVER or REAR SEAT occupancy mode.

Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations withoutlosing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. PressMENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL-TEXTto toggle ON/OFF. When the six strongest stations are filled, the stationstored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strongstations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.When activated, AUTOSET will appear in the display when any of thepreset controls are pressed.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

30

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (31)

Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically andslightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 isthe maximum setting.Press MENU to access and use SEL-TEXT to adjust the volumesetting. The level will appear in the display.Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINSis displayed. Press SEL-TEXT to increase/decrease thehours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.

10. Memory presets: To set astation: Select frequency band, tuneto a station, press and hold a presetbutton until sound returns. In CD mode, press to select a specific CD toplay.

11. On/Off/Volume: Push to turnon/off; turn to adjust the volumelevels.

Note: With the ignition off, you maypress the volume control tomomentarily view the clock.

12. LOAD: Press to load a CD.Press LOAD and a specific preset toload in that particular slot. Availableslots are indicated by small flashing indicators in the display. When thesystem is ready to accept a disc, LOAD CD X will appear in the display.Load the CD. Press and hold to autoload up to 6 discs.

Note: Ensure that the system is ready to accept the CD. Do not forcethe disc into the CD slot as damage could result.

13. AM/FM: Press repeatedly totoggle between AM/FM1/FM2 mode.

14. CD: Press to enter CD mode.Press CD and a preset to select aspecific CD to play.

15. SAT: Your system may be equipped with Satellite Ready capability.The kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through yourauthorized dealer. Detailed satellite instructions are included with thedealer installed kit.Check with your authorized dealer for availability.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

31

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (32)

16. SHUF (Shuffle) /SCAN: Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling ofradio stations or CD tracks on the current CD. Press again to stop.

SHUF (Shuffle): Press and hold to play the CD tracks in random orderfor the CD currently being played. Press again to stop.

GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATIONRadio frequencies: AM and FM frequencies are established by theFederal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:

AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz

FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radioreception:

• Distance/strength: The further you travel from a station, the weakerthe signal and the weaker the reception.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signalmay overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequencyis displayed.

Cassette/player care:

Do:

• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.

• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the holeand turning the hub.

• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.

• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity orcold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.

• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.

Don’t:

• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.

• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not beingplayed.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

32

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (33)

CD/CD player care:

Do:

• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.

• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleanerand wipe from the center out.

Don’t:

• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periodsof time.

• Clean using a circular motion.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technicalincompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compactdiscs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with ascratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. Thelabel may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It isrecommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanentfelt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens maydamage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for furtherinformation.

Audio system warranty and service: Refer to the Warranty Guidefor audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see yourdealer or qualified technician.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems

33

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (34)

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM(IF EQUIPPED)1. Fan speed adjustment: Controlsthe volume of air circulated in thevehicle.

2. Temperature selection:Controls the temperature of theairflow in the vehicle.

3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in thevehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.

MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from theinstrument panel vents only. This mode will help prevent unpleasantodors from entering the vehicle.

NORM A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from theinstrument panel vents only.

VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.

OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.

FLOOR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.

MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents, floorvents and side window demisters.

: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents andthe side window demisters.

Operating tips• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place

the air flow selector in the position.

• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with theair flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.

• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector inMAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicleto “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with theairflow to the back seats.

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base ofthe windshield.

1 2 3

LO

HI

OFF

MIX

VENT FLOOR

MAXA/C

NORMA/C

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Climate Controls

34

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (35)

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:1. Select NORM A/C.

2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

3. Set the fan speed to HI.

4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the ventslocated in the middle of the instrument panel.

Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as theseobjects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC)SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. OFF: Outside air is shut out andthe fan will not operate.

2. AUTOMATIC: PressAUTOMATIC and select the desiredtemperature using the temperaturecontrols. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflowlocation, and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to theselected temperature. The fan speed will remain automatic unless thethumbwheel is turned all the way to LO.

NORM A/C VENT FLOOR FLR • DEF DEF

HI

LOMAX A/C

OUTSIDE TEMP AUTOMATIC

OFFF

AUTO

11 1 2 310

9 8 7 6 5 4

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Climate Controls

35

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (36)

3. Fan speed: Turn to manuallyincrease or decrease fan speed.

4. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defrostervents and the side window demisters.5. Floor/defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshielddefroster vents, floor vents and the side window demisters.6. Floor: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.7. Vent: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.8. Norm A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle . Air flows from theinstrument panel vents only.9. Max A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from theinstrument panel vents only. This mode will help prevent unpleasantodors from entering the vehicle.

10. Outside Temp: Press to displaythe outside temperature. It willremain in the display until pressedagain. The temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle is inmotion.11. Temperature control: Press this control to select the temperature.The display window indicates the selected temperature.

Fahrenheit/Celsius temperature: Press MAX A/C and DEFsimultaneously to toggle between Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature.The set point temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half-degreeincrements.

Operating tips• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place

the air flow selector in the position.

• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with theair flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.

• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector inMAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicleto “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with theairflow to the back seats.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Climate Controls

36

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (37)

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base ofthe windshield.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select NORM A/C.

2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

3. Set the fan speed to HI.

4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the ventslocated in the middle of the instrument panel.

Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as theseobjects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

The rear defroster control is locatedon the instrument panel.

Press the rear defroster control toclear the rear window of thin iceand fog. A small LED will illuminatewhen the rear defroster is activated.

The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear windowdefroster.

The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount oftime or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manuallyturn off the defroster, press the control again.

Activating the rear window defroster will also activate the heated mirrors(if equipped). For more information refer to Heated outside mirrors inthe Driver Controls chapter.

Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the insideof the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of therear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines andwill not be covered by your warranty.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Climate Controls

37

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (38)

HEADLAMP CONTROL

Turns the lamps off.

Turns on the parkinglamps, instrument panel lamps,license plate lamps and tail lamps.

Turns the headlamps on.

Autolamp control

The autolamp system provides lightsensitive automatic on-off control ofthe exterior lights normallycontrolled by the headlamp control.

The autolamp system also keeps thelights on for a predetermined periodof time after the ignition switch isturned to OFF. The delay period canbe adjusted up to a maximum ofapproximately 3 minutes induration.

• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise to the nextposition from OFF.

• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise

The headlamps will also turn on when the wipers are turned on.

To change the duration of the autolamp delay, carry out the followingsequence:

Note: Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10 second period.

1. Start with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the headlampswitch in the AUTOLAMP position.

2. Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position and then back to OFF.

4. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMP position.• At this point, the exterior lamps turn on.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

38

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (39)

5. At the desired autolamp time delay, place the headlamp switch in theOFF position.• At this point, the exterior lamps turn off and the time delay is set.

Foglamp control (if equipped)

The foglamps can be turned onwhen the headlamp control is pulledtoward you and is in any of thefollowing positions:

• Parking lamps

• Low beams

• Autolamps (when active)

Foglamps will turn off when thehighbeams are activated.

High beams

Push the lever toward theinstrument panel to activate. Pullthe lever towards you to deactivate.

Flash to passPull toward you slightly to activateand release to deactivate.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate:

• the key must be in the ON position,

• the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

39

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (40)

• the vehicle is not in Park

Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or duringinclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System

does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provideadequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate yourheadlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

PANEL DIMMER CONTROLUse to adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel during headlampand parklamp operation.

• Rotate the thumbwheel from leftto right to brighten theinstrument panel.

• Rotate the thumbwheel from rightto left to dim the instrumentpanel.

Domelamp Control

The panel dimmer control also controls the domelamp operation.

• Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right, past detent to activate thedomelamp.

• In order to turn off the domelamp, rotate the thumbwheel to the left.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlampsshould be checked by your authorized dealer.

Vertical aim adjustment

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away. Check your headlampalignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlampbeam pattern.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

40

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (41)

• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)

• (2) Center height of lamp toground

• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)

• (4) Horizontal reference line

2. Measure the height of theheadlamp bulb center from theground and mark an 8 foot (2.4meter) horizontal reference line onthe vertical wall or screen at thisheight (a piece of masking tape works well).

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen andopen the hood.

4. On the wall or screen you willobserve an area of high intensitylight. The top of the high intensityarea should touch the horizontalreference line, if not, the beam willneed to be adjusted.

To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to blockthe light from one headlamp whileadjusting the other.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster oneach headlamp. Using a 4 mmwrench, turn the adjuster eitherclockwise (to adjust down) orcounterclockwise (to adjust up).The horizontal edge of the brighterlight should touch the horizontalreference line.

6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND ISNON-ADJUSTABLE.

7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

41

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (42)

TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the leftturn signal.

• Push up to activate the right turnsignal.

The flash rate of the turn signal will speed up considerably if the left orright turn lamp bulb (front or rear) is burned out.

Cornering lamps

When the turn signal is used and the headlamps are on, the corneringlamps will light either the right or left side depending on the direction ofthe turn.

INTERIOR LAMPS

Map/Courtesy lampsThe courtesy lamps light when:

• any door is opened.

• the instrument panel dimmerswitch is rotated past the detent.

• the UNLOCK control of theremote entry controls is pressedand the ignition is OFF.

The reading lamps can be turned onby pressing the rocker controls nextto each lamp.

If equipped with Remote Keyless Entry, the courtesy lamp will illuminatewhenever any door is opened and will remain on for 25 seconds after thedoor is shut or when the ignition is turned to the ON position.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

42

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (43)

With overhead console

With overhead console and moonroof

To turn on the map lamps, press themap lamp control.

Rear courtesy/reading lampsRotate the lens to illuminate thelamp. With the lens in the flatposition, the courtesy lamp lightswhen:

• Any door is opened.

• The panel dimmer thumbwheel isrotated fully to the right pastdetent.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

43

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (44)

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamp CondensationThe headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air entersthe headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility thatcondensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clearwithin 45 minutes of headlamp operation.

Using the right bulbsReplacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbsmust be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and patternand safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assemblyor void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burntime.

Function Trade Number

Headlamp H13Park, turn and sidemarker lamp (front) 3157 AK (amber)Cornering lamp (front) 3156KTail, stop, turn and sidemarker lamp (rear) 3157KBackup lamp 3156KFoglamp 9145License plate lamp 168High-mount brakelamp 912Luggage compartment lamp 212-2Rear reading lamp 578Map lamp 906Visor vanity lamp - Slide on Rail system(SOR)

37

Dual floorwell lamp 906Glove compartment 168All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.

Replacing the interior bulbsCheck the operation of all bulbs frequently.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

44

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (45)

Overhead console lamps

To remove and replace the lamps in the overhead console:

1. Make sure the headlamp switch isin the OFF position and remove theoverhead console from the headlinerby pulling it straight down.

2. Remove the bulb socket from theback of the lamp housing by pullingit straight out.

3. Remove the bulb from the socketby pulling straight out.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.

Replacing headlamp bulbs

To remove the headlamp bulb:

1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position, then open thehood.

2. Remove the three pin type retainers and the radiator sight shield.

3. Remove the front parking lamp assembly, refer to Replacing frontparking/cornering/turn signal lamp in this section.

4. Remove the headlamp retainerbolts and the headlamp assembly.

5. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

45

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (46)

6. Remove the old headlamp bulb byrotating it counterclockwise and pullit out.

7. To install, reverse the removalprocedure. (Re-aiming theheadlamps may be necessary. Foradditional information refer to theheadlamp aiming section in thischapter.)

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out ofchildren’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do

not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb tobreak the next time the headlamps are operated.

Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned withrubbing alcohol before being used.

Note: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlampuntil just before a replacement bulb is installed. Removing the bulb foran extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance.Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lensand reflector. Never turn the headlamps on with the bulb removed.

Replacing front parking/cornering/turn signal lamp bulbs

To remove the parking/cornering/turn signal lamp bulbs:

1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.

2. Remove the three pin type retainers and the radiator shield.

3. Remove two nuts from the backside of the lamp assembly, and pullthe lamp assembly away from thevehicle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

46

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (47)

4. Rotate the bulb socketcounterclockwise and remove fromlamp assembly.

5. Carefully pull bulb straight out ofthe socket and push in the newbulb.

6. To install, reverse the order ofthe removal procedure.

Note: The parking lamp/turn signal bulbs should not be removed fromthe lamp until just before a replacement bulb is installed. Removing thebulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulbperformance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they cansettle on the lens and reflector. Never turn the lamps on with the bulbremoved.

Replacing tail lamp/brake/turn lamp bulbs

The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are locatedin the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.

1. Make sure headlamp switch is inOFF position, then open the trunk,remove pin-type retainer andcarefully pull the carpet away toexpose the lamp assembly hardware.

2. Remove three nuts and the lampassembly from the vehicle.

3. Remove the bulb socket byrotating it counterclockwise, thenpulling it out of the lamp assembly.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

47

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (48)

4. Pull the bulb from the socket andpush in the new bulb.

5. Install the bulb socket into thelamp assembly by rotating itclockwise.

6. Install the lamp assembly on thevehicle with three nuts ensuring thenuts are flush with the body toprevent water from entering the trunk.

7. Carefully push the carpet back in to place and install the pin-typeretainer.

Replacing license plate lamp bulbs1. Make sure headlamp switch is inOFF position, then remove twoscrews, grommets and the licenseplate lamp assembly from the trunklid.

2. Carefully pull the bulb from thesocket and push in the new bulb.

3. Install the lamp assembly ontrunk lid with two grommets,ensuring the grommets are pushedall the way in to the trunk lid and secure with two screws.

Replacing backup lamp bulbs1. Open trunk and remove bulbsocket from the trunk lid by turningcounterclockwise.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket and push in the new bulb.

3. Install the bulb socket in trunk lidby turning clockwise.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

48

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (49)

Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs1. Remove two screws from thelamp assembly.

2. Carefully lift the lamp assemblyup for access to the bulbs.

3. Carefully pull the bulb socket outof the lamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket and push in the new bulb.

To install, reverse the removalprocedure.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Lights

49

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (50)

MULTI-FUNCTION LEVERWindshield wiper: Rotate the endof the control away from you toincrease the speed of the wipers;rotate towards you to decrease thespeed of the wipers.

Windshield washer: Push the endof the stalk:

• briefly: causes a single swipe ofthe wipers without washer fluid.

• a quick push and hold: the wiperswill swipe three times withwasher fluid.

• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated forup to five seconds.

Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few secondsafter washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping downfrom the top of the windshield caused by the washing.

Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluidlevel frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wipermotor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiperblades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.

Windshield wiper/washer features

The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, headlamp control inthe Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

50

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (51)

TILT STEERING WHEELTo adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull and hold the steering wheelrelease control toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown until you find the desiredlocation.

3. Release the steering wheelrelease control. This will lock thesteering wheel in position.

Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)Lift the mirror cover to turn on thevisor mirror lamp.

Slide on rod feature (ifequipped)

Rotate the visor towards the sidewindow and extend it rearward foradditional sunlight coverage.

Note: To stow the visor back intothe headliner, visor must beretracted before moving it backtowards the windshield.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

51

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (52)

CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. Theseinclude:

• Utility compartment

• Power point (inside storage bin)

• Cupholders

• Air vents to the rear seating positions (heat only)

Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure youin a collision.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITHOUT MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according toyour option package. Some of the features in the overhead consoleinclude a compass and HomeLink�. To program the Homelink�, refer toHomelink� Wireless Control System it this chapter.

Electronic compass display (if equipped)

Compass: The compass display is contained in the overhead console.The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W andNW.

The compass reading may be affected when you drive near largebuildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magneticor metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compassaccuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibrationof the compass.

Compass zone adjustment

1. Determine which magnetic zoneyou are in by referring to the zonemap.

2. Turn the ignition to the ONposition.

123

4

5

6 7 8 91011

12

1314

15

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

52

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (53)

3. Press and hold the MODE controluntil VAR appears in the display,then release. The display shouldshow the current zone number.

4. Press the MODE control until thedesired zone number appears. Thedisplay will flash and then return tonormal operation. The zone is nowupdated.

Compass calibration adjustment

Perform this adjustment in an openarea free from steel structures andhigh voltage lines:

1. Press and hold the MODE controluntil CAL appears in the display(approximately eight seconds) andrelease.

2. Drive the vehicle slowly (lessthan 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles untilCAL indicator turns off in about 2–3 complete circles.

3. The compass is now calibrated.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according toyour option package. Some of the features in the overhead consoleinclude Compass, Homelink, and Moon Roof controls.

Compass mode

The compass reading may be affected when you drive near largebuildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magneticor metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affectcompass accuracy.

1. Turn ignition to the ON position.

2. Start the engine.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

53

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (54)

3. From a blank display press andrelease the MODE button once. Thedirectional heading will bedisplayed.

Note: If the compass isde-calibrated, CAL will be displayedin the right corner of the display.Refer to “Calibration mode” in thissection for more details.

4. The overhead console displays the compass heading in one of eightdirections: NORTH, NORTHEAST, EAST, SOUTHEAST, SOUTH,SOUTHWEST, WEST, and NORTHWEST.

Zone variation mode

Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point thatvaries slightly from the northerly direction on maps. A correct zonesetting will eliminate compass heading error.

To set the compass zone:

1. Press and release the MODEbutton until the compass directionalheading is displayed.

2. Hold down the MODE button for5 seconds to enter zone mode. Thedisplay will read PRESS RESET TOSET ZONE XX where XX is thecurrent zone.

3. Release the MODE button.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

54

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (55)

4. Determine which magnetic zoneyou are in by referring to the zonemap.

5. Repeatedly press and release theRESET button to scroll through thezones 1–15 until the desired zone isdisplayed.

6. Press the MODE button to savethe new zone setting and return tothe compass normal mode.

Note: The compass exits the zonesetting mode and returns to its previous setting after one minute of noactivity.

Note: If power is interrupted during the zone setting process, thecompass resets to the same zone it was set to before the zone changeprocess was started.

Calibration mode

For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/airconditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.

To calibrate the compass:

1. Press and release the MODEbutton until the compass directionalheading is displayed.

2. Hold down the MODE button for10 seconds to enter the calibrationmode. The display will read PRESSRESET TO DECAL.

3. Release the MODE button.

123

4

5

6 7 8 91011

12

1314

15

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

55

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (56)

4. Press the RESET button tode-calibrate the compass. Thedisplay will read CIRCLE SLOWLYTO CALIBRATE for a few secondsand then display a direction withCAL displayed on the right side.

5. Drive the vehicle in a tight circlein a magnetically clean area such asan open parking lot.6. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]). Thiswill take up to three circles to complete calibration.7. The correct compass heading will be displayed when the compass iscalibrated.Note: If the RESET button is not pressed, the compass will exitcalibration mode after three minutes of no activity and the originalcalibration data will be restored.

Note: If power is interrupted during the calibration process, the compassresets to the original calibration data from before the calibration processstarted.

HomeLink� wireless control system (if equipped)The HomeLink� Wireless Control System, located on the overheadconsole, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-heldtransmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radiofrequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gateoperators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.When programming your HomeLink� Wireless Control System to agarage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of the wayto prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink�Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards(this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect an object, signaling thedoor to stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. federal safetystandards. For more information, contact HomeLink� at:www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Retain the originaltransmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programmingprocedures (i.e. new HomeLink� equipped vehicle purchase). It is alsosuggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink�buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to Programming in thissection.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

56

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (57)

Programming

Do not program the HomeLink� with the vehicle parked in thegarage.

Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to thesecond (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of theHomeLink�. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in thehand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink� forquicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons. The message CLEARINGCHANNELS will appear on theHomeLink� display.

• After about 20 seconds, themessage CHANNELS CLEAREDwill appear.

Do not repeat step one to program additional hand-held transmitters tothe remaining two HomeLink� buttons. This will erase previouslyprogrammed hand-held transmitter signals into HomeLink�.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm)away from the HomeLink� button you wish to program (located on youroverhead console) while keeping the display in view.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

57

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (58)

3. Simultaneously press and holdboth the HomeLink� and hand-heldtransmitter button. The messageCHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3) TRAININGwill appear on the display. Do notrelease the buttons until step 4has been completed.

Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replacestep 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” section for Canadian residents.

4. When the message CHANNEL “X”(1,2 or 3) TRAINED appears on thedisplay, release both the HomeLink�and hand held transmitter buttons.

• DID NOT TRAIN will be displayedif the channel did not properlytrain.

5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink� button and observe theHomeLink� house icon on the display. If the indicator light(s)underneath the house icon are constant, programming is complete andyour device should activate when the HomeLink� button is pressed andreleased. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink� buttons,begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

58

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (59)

If the indicator light(s) underneath the house icon blink rapidly for twoseconds and then turn to a continuous light, proceed with steps 6through 8 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device.6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the unit).7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and colorof the button may vary by manufacturer.)Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds andrelease the HomeLink� button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceagain, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or otherrolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.HomeLink� should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Toprogram additional HomeLink� buttons begin with step 2 in the“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

Gate operator & Canadian programmingDuring programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stoptransmitting — not allowing enough time for HomeLink� to accept thesignal from the hand-held transmitter.

After completing steps 1 and 2 outlined in the “Programming” section,replace step 3 with the following:

Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it isadvised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to preventoverheating.

• Continue to press and hold theHomeLink� button (note step 3in the “Programming” section)while you press and release —every two seconds (“cycle”)your hand-held transmitter untilthe frequency signal has beenaccepted by the HomeLink�. Themessage CHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3)TRAINING will appear on thedisplay.

• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

59

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (60)

Operating the HomeLink� Wireless Control System

To operate, simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink� button.Activation will now occur for the trained product (garage door, gateoperator, security system, entry door lock, or home or office lightingetc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may alsobe used at any time. In the event that there are still programmingdifficulties, contact HomeLink� at www.homelink.com or1–800–355–3515.

Erasing HomeLink� buttons

To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot beerased):

• Press and hold the two outsidebuttons. The message CLEARINGCHANNELS will appear on theHomeLink� display.

• After about 20 seconds, themessage CHANNELS CLEAREDwill appear on the display. Do nothold for longer that 30 seconds.HomeLink� is now in the train(or learning) mode and can beprogrammed at any timebeginning with step 2 in the“Programming” section.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button

To program a device to HomeLink� using a HomeLink� button previouslytrained, follow these steps:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

60

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (61)

1. Press and hold the desiredHomeLink� button. DO NOTrelease the button. The display willread CHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3)TRANSMIT

2. The display will change toCHANNEL “X” (1,2, or 3)TRAINING after 20 seconds.Without releasing the HomeLink�button, follow step 2 in the“Programming” section.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink� at www.homelink.comor 1–800–355–3515.

AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insertany other object in the power outlet as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the poweroutlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.

The auxiliary power point is located under the cup holder and ashtraydrawer in the center stack. The auxiliary power point for five passengervehicles is located in the floor console storage bin.

Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (ifequipped).

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigarlighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses andrelays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information onchecking and replacing fuses.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the powerpoint longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

61

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (62)

Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.

Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lightersocket.

Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this willdamage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released fromits heating position when it is ready to be used.

Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by yourwarranty.

POWER WINDOWS

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not letchildren play with the power windows. They may seriously injure

themselves.

When closing the power windows, you should verify they are freeof obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in

the proximity of the window openings.

Press and hold the bottom part ofthe rocker switch to open thewindow. Press and hold the top partof the rocker switch to close thewindow.

One touch downAllows the driver’s window to openfully without holding the controldown. Press completely down onthe bottom part of the rocker switchand release quickly. Press the rockerswitch again to stop.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

62

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (63)

Window lockThe window lock feature allows onlythe driver to operate the powerwindows.

To lock out all the window controlsexcept for the driver’s press the leftside of the control. Press the rightside to restore the window controls.

INTERIOR MIRROR

The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support armwhich lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped withan interior rear view mirror whichhas an auto-dimming function. Theelectronic day/night mirror willchange from the normal (highreflective) state to the non-glare(darkened) state when bright lights(glare) reach the mirror. When themirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automaticallyadjust (darken) to minimize glare.

The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever thevehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view whenbacking up.

Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interiorrear view mirror since this may impair proper mirrorperformance.

Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harshabrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

63

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (64)

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power side view mirrors

To adjust your mirrors:

1. Select to adjust the leftmirror or to adjust the rightmirror.

2. Move the control in the directionyou wish to tilt the mirror.

3. Return to the center position tolock mirrors in place.

Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)

Both mirrors are heatedautomatically to remove ice, mistand fog when the rear windowdefrost is activated.

Do not remove ice from themirrors with a scraper orattempt to readjust the mirrorglass if it is frozen in place.These actions could causedamage to the glass and mirrors.

Fold-away mirrorsFold the side mirrors in carefullywhen driving through a narrowspace, like an automatic car wash.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

64

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (65)

POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)The accelerator and brake pedalshould only be adjusted when thevehicle is stopped and the gearshiftlever is in the P (Park) position.

Press and hold the rocker control toadjust accelerator and brake pedal.

• Press the right side of the control to adjust the pedals toward you.

• Press the left side of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.

The adjustment allows for approximately 2.5 inches (65 mm) ofmaximum travel.

Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on thepedals while the vehicle is moving.

SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keepingyour foot on the accelerator pedal.

Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads thatare winding, slippery or unpaved.

Setting speed controlThe controls for using your speedcontrol are located on the steeringwheel for your convenience.

1. Press the ON control and releaseit.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

65

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (66)

3. Press the SET + control andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

5. The indicator light (ifequipped) on the instrument clusterwill turn on.

Note:

• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down asteep hill.

• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, youmay want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.

• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) belowyour set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.

Disengaging speed control

To disengage the speed control:

• Depress the brake pedal

Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.

Resuming a set speedPress the RESUME control andrelease it. This will automaticallyreturn the vehicle to the previouslyset speed.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

66

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (67)

Increasing speed while using speed controlThere are two ways to set a higherspeed:

• Press and hold the SET + controluntil you get to the desiredspeed, then release the control.You can also use the SET +control to operate the Tap-Upfunction. Press and release thiscontrol to increase the vehicle setspeed in small amounts by 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When thevehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.

Reducing speed while using speed controlThere are two ways to reduce a setspeed:

• Press and hold the SET - controluntil you get to the desiredspeed, then release the control.You can also use the SET -control to operate the Tap-Downfunction. Press and release thiscontrol to decrease the vehicleset speed in small amounts by 1mph (1.6 km/h).

• Depress the brake pedal until thedesired vehicle speed is reached,press the SET + control.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

67

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (68)

Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:

• Depress the brake pedal. This willnot erase your vehicle’spreviously set speed.

• Press the speed control OFFcontrol.

Note: When you turn the speedcontrol or the ignition off, yourspeed control set speed memory iserased.

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers use

extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus offthe road. The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation oftheir vehicle. Only use steering wheel controls and other devices notessential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

Audio control featuresIn Radio mode:

• Press NEXT to select the nextpreset station within the currentradio band.

In Tape mode:

• Press NEXT to listen to the nextselection on the tape.

In CD mode:

• Press NEXT to listen to the nexttrack on the disc.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

68

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (69)

In any mode:

• Press VOL + or - to adjust thevolume.

Climate control features• Press TEMP + or - to adjust

temperature.

MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave childrenunattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.

When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free ofobstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the

proximity of the moon roof opening.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

69

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (70)

To vent the moon roof:

• Press and hold the controlforward to raise the moon roof tothe vent position (when the glasspanel is closed).

To open the moon roof:

• For one-touch operation, pressthe control rearward and release;this will fully open the moon roof.

• To stop one-touch operation atthe desired position, press the control in any direction and release.

To close the moon roof:

• Press and hold the control forward.

• To close from the vent position, press and hold the control rearward.

HOMELINK� WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)The HomeLink� Wireless Control System, located on the overheadconsole, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-heldtransmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radiofrequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gateoperators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.

When programming your HomeLink� Wireless Control System toa garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of

the way to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use the HomeLink� Wireless Control System with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required byU.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannotdetect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contactHomeLink� at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as forfuture programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink� equipped vehiclepurchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed Homelink� buttons be erased for security purposes, refer toProgramming in this section.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

70

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (71)

ProgrammingDo not program HomeLink� with the vehicle parked in the garage.

Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to thesecond (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of theHomeLink�. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in thehand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink� forquicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons releasing only when theindicator light begins to flash after20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1to program additional hand-heldtransmitters to the remaining twoHomeLink� buttons. This will erasepreviously programmed hand-heldtransmitter signals into HomeLink�.

2. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm)away from the HomeLink� button you wish to program (located on youroverhead console) while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and holdboth the chosen HomeLink� andhand-held transmitter buttons untilthe HomeLink� indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may releaseboth the HomeLink� and hand-heldtransmitter buttons.

Note: Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may require you toreplace Step 3 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” section forCanadian residents.

4. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmedHomeLink� button up to two separate times to activate the door. If thedoor does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink�button and observe the indicator light.• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is completeand your device should activate when the HomeLink� button is pressedand released.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

71

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (72)

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turnsto a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 5 through7 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (mostcommonly a garage door opener).5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the unit).6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name andcolor of the button may vary by manufacturer.)Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 7.7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds andrelease the HomeLink� button. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence again and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a thirdtime to complete the programming.

HomeLink� should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Toprogram additional HomeLink� buttons begin with Step 2 in the“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

Gate Operator & Canadian ProgrammingDuring programming, yourhand-held transmitter mayautomatically stop transmitting —not allowing enough time forHomeLink� to accept the signalfrom the hand-held transmitter.

After completing Steps 1 and 2outlined in the “Programming”section, replace Step 3 with thefollowing:

Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it isadvised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to preventoverheating.

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink� button (note Step 3 in the“Programming” section) while you press and release — every twoseconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequencysignal has been accepted by the HomeLink�. The indicator light willflash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink� accepts the radiofrequency signal.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

72

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (73)

• Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.

Operating the HomeLink� Wireless Control SystemTo operate, simply press and releasethe appropriate HomeLink� button.Activation will now occur for thetrained product (garage door, gateoperator, security system, entrydoor lock, or home or office lightingetc.). For convenience, thehand-held transmitter of the devicemay also be used at any time. In theevent that there are stillprogramming difficulties, contactHomeLink� at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

Erasing HomeLink� buttonsTo erase the three programmedbuttons (individual buttons cannotbe erased):

• Press and hold the two outerHomeLink� buttons until theindicator light begins toflash-after 20 seconds. Releaseboth buttons. Do not hold forlonger that 30 seconds.

HomeLink� is now in the train (orlearning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step2 in the “Programming” section.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink� buttonTo program a device to HomeLink� using a HomeLink� button previouslytrained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� button. Do NOT release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the HomeLink� button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”section.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink� at www.homelink.comor 1–800–355–3515.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

73

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (74)

MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)With the ignition in the ON position,the message center, located on yourinstrument cluster, displaysimportant vehicle informationthrough a constant monitor ofvehicle systems. You may selectdisplay features on the messagecenter for a display of status. Thesystem will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display ofsystem warnings followed by a long indicator chime.

Your display can show up to 3 reconfigurable telltales at one time. Whatever is displayed in the top left corner has the highest priority. PremiumDisplay Severity Indicator (located under the Message Center): Indicatesseverity of the information being displayed on the premium display. Redfor high severity, amber for medium severity, and non-lit for informationonly. For example, a door ajar warning would be accompanied by a redindicator, low fuel by an amber indicator, and fuel economy by anabsence of the indicator. The indicator always illuminates with thehighest severity rating of the warnings displayed.

Selectable features

SelectPress this control to select functions shown in the INFO menu andSETUP menu.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

74

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (75)

ResetPress this control to reset functions shown in the INFO menu andSETUP menu.

Info menuThis control displays the following control displays:

• Trip odometer/Odometer

• Distance to Empty

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instantaneous Fuel Economy

• Trip elapsed drive time

Odometer/Trip odometerRefer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

Distance to empty (DTE)Selecting this function from theINFO menu estimates approximatelyhow far you can drive with the fuelremaining in your tank undernormal driving conditions.Remember to turn the ignition OFFwhen refueling to allow this featureto correctly detect the added fuel.

The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone forone second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. Ifyou RESET this warning message, this display and tone will returnwithin 10 minutes or 10 miles(16 km).

DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is basedon your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is notthe same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fueleconomy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery isdisconnected.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

75

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (76)

Average fuel economy (AFE)Select this function from the INFOmenu to display your average fueleconomy in miles/gallon or liters/100km.

If you calculate your average fueleconomy by dividing gallons of fuelused by 100 miles traveled(kilometers traveled by liters used),your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:

• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up

• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps atservice stations

• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another

• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)

1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed controlsystem engaged to display a stabilized average.

2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.

It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for 2seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control toget accurate highway fuel economy readings.

Instantaneous fuel economySelect this function from the INFOmenu to display your instantaneousfuel economy. This will display yourfuel economy as a Bar Graphranging from poor economyto excellent economy.

Your vehicle must be moving tocalculate instantaneous fueleconomy. When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows oneor no bars illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

76

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (77)

Trip elapsed drive timeSelect this function from the INFOmenu to display a timer.

To operate the Trip Elapsed DriveTime perform the following:

1. Press and release RESET in orderto start the timer.

2. Press and release RESET topause the timer.3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer tozero.

Setup menuPress this control for the following displays:

• System Check• Display (odometer/speedometer)• Text Size (normal/large)• Units (English/Metric)• Language• Oil Minder Start Value

System checkSelecting this function from theSETUP menu causes the messagecenter to cycle through each of thesystems being monitored. For eachof the monitored systems, themessage center will indicate eitheran OK message or a warningmessage for three seconds.Pressing the SELECT control cycles the message center through each ofthe systems being monitored.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

77

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (78)

The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in themessage center is as follows:

1. OIL LIFE— PRESS RESET IF NEW OIL

2. WASHER FLUID

3. AIR SUSPENSION (if equipped))

4. RECONFIGURABLE TELLTALES— OK— FAILED RED— FAILED AMBER

Display Type1. Select this function from theSETUP menu.

2. Press the SELECT control tochange the display.

Text Size1. Select this function from theSETUP menu.

2. Press the SELECT control tochange text size.

Units (English/Metric)1. Select this function from theSETUP menu for the current unitsto be displayed.

2. Press the SELECT control tochange from English to Metric.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

78

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (79)

Language1. Select this function from theSETUP menu for the currentlanguage to be displayed.

2. Pressing the SELECT controlcycles the message center througheach of the language choices.

Oil Minder Start Value1. Select this function from theSETUP control for the currentdisplay mode.

2. Press the SELECT control tochange oil value.

System warningsSystem warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in yourvehicle’s operating systems.In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center willcycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4seconds.The message center will display the last selected feature if there are nomore warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality ofthe message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing theRESET control and clearing the warning message.Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:

• They cannot be reset until the condition is corrected.

• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

79

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (80)

• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has beencompleted.

This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist withinthe vehicle.

Warning display Status

Door Ajar Warning cannot be resetCoolant over temperature Warning returns after 10 minutesPowertrain malfunctionCheck fuel capCheck air suspensionLow fuelOverdrive ON/OFF Warning returns after the ignition key

is turned from OFF to ON.Trunk ajarLow tire pressureTire pressure monitor faultTire pressure sensor faultCheck compass moduleLow washer fluidChange engine oil

DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door is not completely closed.

POWERTRAIN MALFUNCTION. Displayed when the powertrain is notoperating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the enginecoolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turnoff the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Referto Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. Ifthe warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine isrunning or hot.

CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properlyinstalled. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuelfiller cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

80

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (81)

CHECK AIR SUSPENSION. Displayed when the air suspension systemis not operating properly. If this message is displayed while driving, pulloff the road as soon as safely possible. For more information, refer to Airsuspension in the Driving chapter.LOW FUEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Warning message can be reset by pressing the RESET button, but willreturn after 10 minutes. If any other button is pressed besides RESET,the message ’’PRESS RESET TO CLEAR’’ will appear in the MessageCenter. Once this message disappears (after approximately 2 seconds),press RESET to clear the warning.TRUNK AJAR. Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.OVERDRIVE ON/OFF. Displayed when the overdrive is enabled ordisabled.LOW TIRE PRESSURE. Displayed when one or more tires on yourvehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in theTires, Wheels and Loading chapter.TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. Displayed when the TirePressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on orcontinues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorizeddealer.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT. Displayed when a tire pressuresensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use (Note: this includesthe use of the optional full-sized matching spare tire and wheel). Formore information on how the system operates under these conditions,refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in theTires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on orcontinues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorizeddealer.CHECK COMPASS MODULE. Displayed when the compass is notoperating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.LOW WASHER FLUID. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less thanone quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to Windshieldwasher fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL. Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is5 percent or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%, the CHANGEOIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, theOIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed.

An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center andaccording to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLYRECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

81

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (82)

To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change[approximately 7,500 miles (12,070 km) or 6 months] perform thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the RESETcontrol for 2 seconds and release.Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFEXXX% HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL”is displayed.

2. Press and hold the RESETcontrol for 3 seconds and release.Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFESTART VALUE SET TO XXX%” isdisplayed.

POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT

Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installedfloor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the

brake pedals.

Position the driver floor mat so thatthe eyelet is over the pointed end ofthe retention post and rotateforward to lock in. Make sure thatthe mat does not interfere with theoperation of the accelerator or thebrake pedal. To remove the floormat, reverse the installationprocedure.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

82

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (83)

INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROLThe remote trunk release control islocated on the driver’s door trimpanel and can be operated at anytime.

You can render the switchinoperable by locking the buttonwith your master key.

If equipped with a perimeter alarm system, the remote trunk releasecontrol and power door locks will be disabled when the vehicle perimeteralarm system is armed. This control will not work until the vehicleperimeter alarm system is disarmed. Refer to Perimeter Alarm Systemin the Locks and Security chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driver Controls

83

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (84)

KEYSThe vehicle is equipped with a master key which will access the vehicle’sdoors, trunk, glove box, ignition and remote trunk release.

POWER DOOR LOCKS

Power door trim switch inhibitThis feature disables the power door locks and trunk interior releaseswitches if all doors are closed and the perimeter alarm becomes armed.

Once the power door trim switches are disabled, they can only becomeactive when perimeter alarm is disarmed.

Press control to unlock all vehicledoors.

Press control to lock all vehicledoors.

Smart locks (if equipped)With the key in any ignition position, and either the driver’s orpassenger’s door open, the doors cannot be locked using the power doorlock switches.

The vehicle may still be locked with the key in the ignition, andperforming one of the following actions:

• Pressing the manual lock button on the door.

• Operating the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).

• Operating the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).

• Operating the driver’s door with a key.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

84

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (85)

Autolock (if equipped)This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when:• all doors are closed,• the engine is running,• you shift into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Auto-relockThe autolock feature repeats when:• a door is opened and closed while the engine is running,• you shift into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Auto-unlockThe auto-unlock feature will unlock all doors when:• the ignition has been in the 3 (ON) position, all doors are closed, and

the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20km/h),

• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 2(ACCESSORY) or 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, and

• the driver door is opened {within ten minutes after the ignition wastransitioned to the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 1 (OFF/LOCK) position}.

Note: The vehicle doors will not auto-unlock if the vehicle has beenelectronically locked prior to the driver door being opened.

Deactivating/activating the autolock or auto-unlock featureAutomatic door locks can also be turned on/off through the followingprocedure:

You must complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure willhave to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you mustwait at least 30 seconds. Note: Before following the procedure, makesure that the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and all vehicledoors, the hood, and the decklid are closed.

1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.

2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.

3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.

4. Press the power door unlock control three times.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

85

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (86)

5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position.

6. The door locks will lock/unlock to confirm programming mode isentered/active.

7. With the ignition still in the 3 (ON) position, for the autolockfeature, press the unlock control once then press the lock control once.The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one shortand one long chirp) if autolock was activated. For the auto-unlockfeature, press the lock control once, then press the unlock control once.The horn will chirp once if auto-unlock was deactivated or twice (oneshort and one long chirp) if auto-unlock was activated.

If any door, the hood, or the deck lid is open, the horn will chirptwice, and the procedure will need to be performed again.

8. After having waited the necessary time for the programming toconfirm, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.

Once disabled, the autolock or auto-unlock feature can be enabled byrepeating the procedure in Steps 1–8.

CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKSWhen these locks are set, the reardoors cannot be opened from theinside. The rear doors can beopened from the outside when thedoors are unlocked.

The childproof locks are located onrear edge of each rear door andmust be set separately for eachdoor. Setting the lock for one doorwill not automatically set the lockfor both doors.

Move lock control up to engage thechildproof lock. Move control downto disengage childproof locks.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

86

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (87)

INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASEYour vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartmentrelease handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults inthe event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation andlocation of the release handle.

To open the luggage compartmentdoor (lid) from within the luggagecompartment, pull the illuminated“T” shaped handle and push up onthe trunk lid. The handle iscomposed of a material that willglow for hours in darkness followingbrief exposure to ambient light.

The “T” shaped handle will belocated either on the luggagecompartment door (lid) or insidethe luggage compartment near thetail lamps.

Keep vehicle doors andluggage compartment

locked and keep keys and remotetransmitters out of a child’s reach.Unsupervised children could lockthemselves in the trunk and riskinjury. Children should be taughtnot to play in vehicles.

On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior canrise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high

temperatures for even a short time can cause death or seriousheat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children areparticularly at risk.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

87

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (88)

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doorswithout a key.

The remote entry features operatewith the ignition in any position,except in the 3 (ON) , with thetransmission not in either P (Park)or N (Neutral).

If there are problems with theremote entry system, make sure totake ALL remote entrytransmitters with you to theauthorized dealer in order to aid introubleshooting the problem.

Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interiorlamps will illuminate.

2. Press and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.

Locking the doors

Press once to lock all the doors. Upon the first press the doors willlock and the parklamps/taillamps will flash once.

Press again within three seconds to receive confirmation that thevehicle was successfully locked. Note: If all vehicle doors, the hood, andthe trunk are closed upon the second press of the , the horn willchirp once and the parklamps/taillamps will flash once to confirm thesuccessful locking.

Upon the second press of the , if any door, the hood, or the trunk isnot securely closed the horn will chirp twice to warn that successfullylocking was not complete. The park/taillamps will NOT flash if any dooris ajar.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

88

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (89)

Car finder

Press twice within 3 seconds. The horn will chirp and theparklamps/taillamps will flash. It is recommended that this method beused to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.

Sounding a panic alarm

Press on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm. Note: Thepanic alarm only works with the ignition in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.

Press a second time to deactivate the alarm. You may also deactivatethe alarm by turning the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.

Opening the trunk

Press once to open the trunk.

• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving yourvehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fallout or block the driver’s rear view.

This feature will not work with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph (5km/h) if the ignition is in the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 3 (ON) position.

Replacing the battery

The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithiumbattery CR2032 or equivalent.

To replace the battery:

1. Twist a thin coin between the twohalves of the remote entrytransmitter near the key ring. DONOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVERAND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THEFRONT HOUSING OF THEREMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

89

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (90)

2. Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals on the backsurface of the circuit board.

3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entrytransmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the batterydown to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housingcavity.

5. Snap the two halves back together.

Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitterto become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmittershould operate normally after battery replacement.

Replacing lost transmitters

Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your authorized dealer if service isrequired.

If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove itfrom the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additionalremote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:

• Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your authorized dealer forprogramming, or

• Perform the following programming procedure yourself:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

90

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (91)

Note: Ensure the brake pedal is notdepressed during this sequence.

Place the key in the ignition andcycle from 1 (OFF/LOCK) to 3 (ON)eight times in rapid successionwithin 10 seconds. After doorslock/unlock, press any control on alltransmitters (up to four). Afterpressing the control on each remotetransmitter, the door will lock andunlock. If programming multiple remote transmitters, you must press thecontrol buttons on each remote transmitter within 7 seconds of eachother to remain in programming mode. When completed, turn theignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK).All transmitters must be programmed at the same time.• When completed, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and

wait at least 20 seconds in order to use the recently programmedtransmitter(s).

• All transmitters must be programmed during the same programmingcycle. A transmitter that is not programmed within the sameprogramming cycle will be erased and will no longer operate yourvehicle’s locks. If this occurs, you will have to reprogram all thetransmitters again, as you cannot just “add” a transmitter.

Illuminated entryThe interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used tounlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:• the ignition switch is turned to the 2 (ACCESSORY), 3 (ON) or 4

(START) positions, or• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or• after 25 seconds of illumination.The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for theilluminated entry system to operate.The inside lights will not turn off if:

• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or

• any door is open.

The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after thelast door is closed, or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open.

4

3

2

1

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

91

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (92)

Radio type approval numbers for remote entry receiver

If the type approval of your remote entry system is inspected in one ofthe countries listed in the following table, refer to the correspondingapproval number:

Remote entry receiver certification numbers

Gabon 01070305/ARTEL/GABTELJordan CAZ/ENG/CA/04/11/1Zambia TRC/LPD/2004/28

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)With the keyless entry keypad, youcan:

• lock or unlock the vehicle doorswithout using the key.

• open the trunk.See also Remote entry system in this chapter for more information.Your vehicle has a factory-set 5–digit code that operates the keylessentry system. You can also program your own 5–digit personal entrycode.The factory-set code is located:• On the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment, or• At your dealer.When using the keyless entry keypad, press the middle of each button inorder to ensure a good activation.

Programming a personal entry codeYou can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle.These codes do not replace the permanent code that the authorizeddealer gave you.

To create your own personal entry code:

1. Enter the factory set code. Note: The keypad will illuminate whenpressed.

2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter theprogramming mode.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

92

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (93)

3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be enteredwithin five seconds of each other.4. Press 1 • 2 to store the first personal code.5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm programming of the newcode.To store a second personal code:1. Enter the factory set code.2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter theprogramming mode.3. Enter a second personal 5-digit code. Each number must be enteredwithin five seconds of each other.4. Press 3 • 4 to store the second personal code.5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of thenew code.To store a third personal code:1. Enter the factory set code.2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter theprogramming mode.3. Enter a third personal 5-digit code. Each number must be enteredwithin five seconds of each other.4. Press 5 • 6 (or 7 • 8, or 9 • 0, or wait five seconds) to store the thirdpersonal code.

5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of thenew code.

Tips:

• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.

• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.

• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personalcode.

Erasing personal codeTo erase all of the personal entry codes programmed to a vehicle:

1. Enter the factory-set code.

2. Press and release 1 • 2 within 5 seconds of step 1.

3. Press and hold 1 • 2 for two seconds. All of the vehicle doors will lockand then unlock to confirm erasure.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

93

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (94)

Unlocking the doors and releasing the trunk with the keyless entrysystemTo unlock the driver door, enter either the factory-set code or personalcode (each digit pressed within 5 seconds of prior digit). The interiorlamps will illuminate.

• To unlock all doors, enter the factory-set code or personal code(driver door unlocks) and press 3 • 4 within five seconds.

• To release the trunk, enter the factory-set code or personal code(driver door unlocks) and press 5 • 6 within five seconds.

After the factory-set code or personal code has been entered, you canunlock all doors (press 3 • 4) and release the trunk (press 5 • 6) aslong as the controls are pressed within 5 seconds of each other.

Locking doors with the keyless entry systemIt is not necessary to enter the factory-set code prior to locking all doors.To lock the doors, press 7 • 8 and press 9 • 0 at the same time. Note:The doors will not lock if the driver door is ajar.

Anti-scan featureIf the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive buttonpresses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disablesthe keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.

The anti-scan feature will turn off after:

• one minute of keypad inactivity.

• pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter.

• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position.

SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEMSecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilizationsystem. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from beingstarted unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. Theuse of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

94

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (95)

Radio type approval numbers for Immobiliser System PATS XCVR

If the type approval of your immobilizer system is inspected in one of thecountries listed in the following table, refer to the correspondingapproval number:

Immobiliser System PATS XCVR certification numbers

TX Frequency: 134,2 kHz -8,1 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Country Name Type Approval Number

American Samoa (USA) See USABahrain DLM/GEN/18/18/16

Barbados 340/3 Vol.IICanada CANADA: 3043104475AChina CMII ID:2005DJ0428Ghana SPLS / -485 / 2001

Guam (USA) See USAJordan 4/U/U/4250Kenya CCK/ES/100/0Kuwait M.C/U.S.0 /5/7-12579

Mauritius TA/2005/15Mayotte (F)

Mexico RLVVIVP03-324Morocco MR 1299 ANRT 2004

Netherlands Antilles (NL)Nicaragua NCG-CE-04-004

Northern Mariana Islands See USAOman OMA/1265(A) 1308/2001

Puerto Rico See USAQatar QTEL/SR/2003/R-276

Saudi Arabia (10/1900)South Korea R-LPD1-04-0145

Tunisia 269/MAT/2004United Arabian Emirates 5/10-2/3274/3774

Uruguay 025/FR/2003USA NT8-15607PAT3XCVR

Zambia CAZ/ENG/CA/2005/02/8

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

95

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (96)

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may bepurchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer canprogram your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keysyourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how toprogram the coded key.

Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems mayresult in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.

Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used topurchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the samekey chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent theseobjects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. Theseobjects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause amomentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting theengine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)position, remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded keyand restart the engine.

Anti-theft indicator

The anti-theft indicator is the flashing red indicator located on the dashpanel.

• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator willflash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock™ system isfunctioning as a theft deterrent.

• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.

If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock™ system, the indicator will flashrapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. Ifthis occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer forservice.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

96

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (97)

Automatic armingThe vehicle is armed immediatelyafter switching the ignition to the 1(OFF/LOCK) position.

The theft indicator on theinstrument panel will flash everytwo seconds when the vehicle isarmed.

Automatic disarmingSwitching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarmsthe vehicle.

• The theft indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for threeseconds and then go out.

• If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time orflashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your authorized dealer.

Replacement keysIf your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Thekey codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys willneed to be programmed.

Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed keyaway from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent anyinconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additionalspare or replacement keys.

Programming spare keysA maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. OnlySecuriLock™ keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, youwill need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that alreadyoperate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readilyaccessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.

If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you mustbring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare codedkey(s) programmed.

4

3

2

1

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

97

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (98)

Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.

1. Insert the first previouslyprogrammed coded key into theignition and turn the ignition from 1(OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position(maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for atleast one second).

2. Turn ignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK)and remove the first coded keyfrom the ignition.

3. Within ten seconds of removingthe first coded key, insert the second previously programmed codedkey into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3(ON) position (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second but nomore than ten seconds).

4. Turn the ignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK) and remove the second coded keyfrom the ignition.

5. Within twenty seconds of removing the second coded key, insert thenew unprogrammed key (new key) into the ignition and turn the ignitionfrom 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position (maintain ignition in 3 (ON)for at least one second). This step will program your new key.

6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait at least 20seconds and repeat this procedure from Step 1.

If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and thetheft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.

If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engineand the theft indicator will flash on and off. You may repeat Steps 1through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealerto have the new spare key(s) programmed.

PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of anunauthorized entry to your vehicle.

If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorizeddealer to aid in troubleshooting.

4

3

2

1

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

98

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (99)

Arming the systemWhen armed, the perimeter alarm will notify you of an unauthorizedentry. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the parklamps and will sound the horn.

The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Anyof the following actions will arm the alarm system:

• Press the remote transmitter lock control one time to arm the system.

• Lock all doors using the keypad.

• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver orpassenger door is open and then closed.

If all the closures (doors, trunk, hood) are closed, the park lamps willflash once and the horn will chirp once when the on the remoteentry transmitter is pressed a second time within five seconds.

If any closure is not properly closed, the park lamps will not flash andthe horn will chirp twice.

The system will wait 20 seconds after one of the arming actions isperformed before allowing the alarm to become armed. After the20–second pre-arm phase, the interior trim remote trunk release controland the power door unlock control are disabled, in order to furtherprotect your vehicle.

Disarming the systemYou can disarm the system by any of the following actions:

• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter.

• Unlock the doors using a valid code on the keypad.

• Unlock the doors with the key in the key lock cylinder.

• Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Locks and Security

99

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (100)

SEATING

Adjustable head restraints

Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that itis located directly behind your head or as close to that position aspossible. Refer to the following to raise and lower the head restraints.

The head restraints can be movedup and down.

Push control to lower head restraint.

Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle ismoving.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

100

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (101)

Lift handle to move seat forward orbackward.

Pull lever up to adjust seatback.

Before returning theseatback to its original

position, make sure that cargo orany objects are not trappedbehind the seatback. Afterreturning the seatback to itsoriginal position, pull on theseatback to ensure that it has fullylatched. An unlatched seat maybecome dangerous in the event ofa sudden stop or collision.

Using the manual recline function (if equipped)

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle ismoving.

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuringpeople in a collision or sudden stop.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under theseat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the

event of a collision.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

101

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (102)

To adjust the front seatback usingthe manual recliner:

• Lift and hold the handle locatedon the side of the seat.

• Lean against the seatback toadjust it to your desired position.You can recline the seat back orbring it forward.

• Release the handle when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the power front seats – door mounted controls(if equipped)

The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each frontdoor.

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle ismoving.

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuringpeople in a collision or sudden stop.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under theseat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the

event of a collision.

Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclinedtoo far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the

decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury ordeath in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

102

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (103)

To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not hang objectsoff seat back or stow objects in map pocket (if equipped) when a

child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place objects underneath thefront passenger seat or between the seat and the center console (ifequipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off”indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front passengersensing system section for additional details. Failure to follow theseinstructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system.

Press the control to recline theseatback forward or backward.

Press to move the seat forward orbackward.

Press to move the front portion ofthe seat cushion up or down.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

103

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (104)

Press to move the rear portion ofthe seat cushion up or down.

Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)The power lumbar control is locatedon the outboard side of the seat.

Press one side of the control toadjust firmness.

Press the other side of the control to adjust softness.

Heated seats (if equipped)The heated seat control is located on the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor.

To operate the heated seats:

• Push the indicated side of thecontrol for maximum heat.

• Push again to deactivate.

• Push the indicated side of thecontrol for minimum heat.

• Push again to deactivate.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

104

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (105)

The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While theignition is in the ON position, activating the high or low heated seatswitch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn offautomatically when the ignition is turned to the OFF position.The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have beenactivated.

REAR SEATS

Seat mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment(if equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped withcup holders in the rear seat armrest.To access the cup holders, fold thearmrest down.

Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure youin a collision.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS

Personal Safety System™The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level offrontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to helpfurther reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able toanalyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activatingthe appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range ofoccupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of the following items:

• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints

• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,and safety belt usage sensors

• Driver’s seat position sensor

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

105

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (106)

• Front crash severity sensor

• Front passenger sensing system

• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp

• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors

• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone

• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety beltpretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat positionsensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.

How does the Personal Safety System™ work?The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of yourvehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupantconditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors providesinformation to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, theRCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or bothstages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crashseverity and occupant conditions.

The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both frontseat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong withthe system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determinedthe accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were notappropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designedto activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficientlongitudinal deceleration.

Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraintsThe dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbaginflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for morecommon, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used forthe most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraintssection in this chapter.

Front crash severity sensorThe front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect theseverity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuableinformation early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. Thisallows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between differentlevels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of thedual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

106

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (107)

Driver’s seat position sensorThe driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ totailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seatposition. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sittingclose to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.

Front passenger sensing systemFor airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and thisforce can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very closeto the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infantsin rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sittingvery close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when theoccupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seatsand they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective wayto reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupantsare properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children aremuch safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than inthe front.

Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place arear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must

use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all theway back.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the backseat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the frontpassenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system isdesigned to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbagdeployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passengerseat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usagerecommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLYencouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. Thesensor also turns off the passenger front airbag when the passenger seatis empty. The sensor turns off the passenger seat-mounted side airbag (ifequipped) when the seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled.

When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system hasturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontalairbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags sectionof this chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

107

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (108)

Front safety belt usage sensors

The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver andfront outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This informationallows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deploymentand safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.

Front safety belt pretensionersThe safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions aredesigned to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s bodyduring frontal collisions and in side collisions. This helps increase theeffectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety beltpretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficientseverity, together with the front airbags.

Front safety belt energy management retractorsThe front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allowwebbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlledmanner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helpsreduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest bylimiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management featuresection in this chapter.

Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operationalThe Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrumentcluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Referto the Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routinemaintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not required.

The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuitsand the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, frontpassenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. Inaddition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in theinstrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one ormore of the following.

• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.

• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition isturned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeatperiodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

108

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (109)

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the PersonalSafety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unlessserviced, the system may not function properly in the event of acollision.

Safety restraints precautions

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the backseat where they can be properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while thevehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from

injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people toride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likelyto die than a person wearing a safety belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety beltassembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that

are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on theoutside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the insideshoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

109

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (110)

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the backseat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has beenclosed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check

seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.

Combination lap and shoulder belts1. Insert the belt tongue into theproper buckle (the buckle closest tothe direction the tongue is comingfrom) until you hear a snap and feelit latch. Make sure the tongue issecurely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, push the releasebutton and remove the tongue fromthe buckle.

Energy management feature

• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy managementfeature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reducethe risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

• The energy management feature is designed to pay out webbing in acontrolled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the beltforce acting on the occupant’s chest.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

110

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (111)

Lap belts

Adjusting the front center seat lap belt (if equipped)

The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around thehips, not across the waist.

The lap belt does not adjustautomatically. Insert the tongue intothe correct buckle (the buckleclosest to the direction the tongue iscoming from). To lengthen the belt,turn the tongue at a right angle tothe belt and pull across your lapuntil it reaches the buckle. Totighten the belt, pull the loose endof the belt through the tongue untilit fits snugly across the hips.

Shorten and fasten the belt whennot in use.

The front outboard and rear safetyrestraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts.The front outboard passenger andrear seat safety belts have threetypes of locking modes described asfollows:

Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt lengthadjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehiclemovement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a cornersharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduceforward movement of the driver and passengers.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

111

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (112)

Webbing extraction sensitive mode

The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and preventsmore belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly. Thebelt will unlock when you stop pulling on it.

Automatic locking mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt is pre-locked. The belt will still retract toremove any slack in the shoulder belt.

The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.

When to use the automatic locking mode

• Any time a child safety seat, except a booster, is installed in apassenger front outboard or any rear seating position. Children 12years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seatwhenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or SafetySeats for Children later in this chapter.

How to use the automatic locking mode• Buckle the combination lap and

shoulder belt.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

112

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (113)

• Grasp the shoulder portion andpull downward until the entirebelt is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clickingsound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic lockingmode.

How to disengage the automatic locking mode

Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety beltassemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by an

authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the �automaticlocking retractor� feature for child seats is still working properly. Safetybelt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and mustbe replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure toreplace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk ofinjury in a collision.

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retractcompletely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate thevehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Safety belt extension assemblyIf the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.

Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safetybelt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing onthe label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is tooshort for you when fully extended.

Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder beltacross the torso.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

113

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (114)

Front safety belt height adjustmentYour vehicle has safety belt heightadjustments for the driver and frontoutboard passenger. Adjust theheight of the shoulder belt so thebelt rests across the middle of yourshoulder.

To lower the shoulder belt height,push the button and slide the heightadjuster down. To raise the heightof the shoulder belt, push thebutton and slide the height adjusterup. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.

Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt restsacross the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety

belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt andincrease the risk of injury in a collision.

Safety belt maintenanceInspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they workproperly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make surethere are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety beltassemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckleassemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulderbelt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (ifequipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attachinghardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Companyrecommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved ina collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and anauthorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continueto operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety beltassemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety beltassembly under the above conditions could result in severe

personal injuries in the event of a collision.

For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaningchapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

114

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (115)

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and achime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

Conditions of operation

If... Then...

The driver’s safety belt is notbuckled before the ignitionswitch is turned to the ONposition...

The safety belt warning lightilluminates 1-2 minutes and thewarning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.

The driver’s safety belt isbuckled while the indicatorlight is illuminated and thewarning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light andwarning chime turn off.

The driver’s safety belt isbuckled before the ignitionswitch is turned to the ONposition...

The safety belt warning light andindicator chime remain off.

Belt-Minder�

The Belt-Minder� feature is a supplemental warning to the safety beltwarning function. This feature provides additional reminders byintermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warninglight in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’ssafety belt is unbuckled.

The Belt-Minder� feature uses information from the front passengersensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present andtherefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating theBelt-Minder� feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determinedby the front passenger sensing system.

Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored andeither may activate the Belt-Minder� feature. The warnings are the samefor the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder� warnings haveexpired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driveror front passenger), the other occupant can still activate theBelt-Minder� feature.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

115

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (116)

If... Then...

The driver’s and frontpassenger’s safety belts arebuckled before the ignitionswitch is turned to the ONposition or less than 1-2minutes have elapsed since theignition switch has been turnedON...

The Belt-Minder� feature will notactivate.

The driver’s or frontpassenger’s safety belt is notbuckled when the vehicle hasreached at least 3 mph (5km/h) and 1-2 minutes haveelapsed since the ignitionswitch has been turned toON...

The Belt-Minder� feature is activated- the safety belt warning lightilluminates and the warning chimesounds for 6 seconds every 30seconds, repeating for approximately5 minutes or until the safety belts arebuckled.

The driver’s or frontpassenger’s safety belt becomesunbuckled for approximately 1minute while the vehicle istraveling at least 3 mph (5km/h) and more than 1-2minutes have elapsed since theignition switch has been turnedto ON...

The Belt-Minder� feature is activated- the safety belt warning lightilluminates and the warning chimesounds for 6 seconds every 30seconds, repeating for approximately5 minutes or until the safety belts arebuckled.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

116

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (117)

The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts(All statistics based on U.S. data):

Reasons given... Consider...

“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. Themore we drive, the more we areexposed to “rare” events, even forgood drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be

seriously injured in a crash during

our lifetime.

“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25

miles (40 km) of home.“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance

comfort. If you are uncomfortable -try different positions for the safetybelt upper anchorage and seatbackwhich should be as upright aspossible; this can improve comfort.

“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.

Belt-Minder� reminds us to take a fewseconds to buckle up.

“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,reduce risk of death to front seatoccupants by 45% in cars, and by60% in light trucks.

“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in

single-vehicle crashes, many whenno other vehicles are around.

“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can domuch more than wrinkle your clothes,particularly if you are unbelted.

“The people I’m with don’twear belts”

Set the example, teen deaths occur 4times more often in vehicles withTWO or MORE people. Children andyounger brothers/sisters imitatebehavior they see.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

117

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (118)

Reasons given... Consider...

“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection whenused with safety belts. Frontal airbagsare not designed to inflate in rear andside crashes or rollovers.

“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who areejected are 40 times more likely

to DIE. Safety belts help preventejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OURCRASH”.

Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplateinto the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder� chime. To do so may

adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag system.

One time disableIf at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbucklesthe safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder� is disabled forthe current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder� feature will enable duringthe same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled forapproximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one timedisable.

Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder� featureThe driver and front passenger Belt-Minder� aredeactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activatingone seating position, do not buckle the other position as this willterminate the process.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with thedeactivation/activation programming procedure.

Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder� features must bedisabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during thesame key cycle.

The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder� features can bedeactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure that:

• The parking brake is set

• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

118

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (119)

• The ignition switch is in the OFF position

• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled

While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt-Minder�, thissystem is designed to improve your chances of being safely

belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave theBelt-Minder� system activated for yourself and others who may use thevehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate theBelt-Minder� feature while driving the vehicle.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOTSTART THE ENGINE)

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1minute)

• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety beltwarning light turns off.

3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, bucklethen unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety beltwarning light turns off.)

• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will beturned on for three seconds.

4. Within approximately 7 seconds of the light turning off, buckle thenunbuckle the safety belt.

• This will disable the Belt-Minder� feature for that seating position if itis currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warninglight will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.

• This will enable the Belt-Minder� feature for that seating position if itis currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warninglight will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint systemwarning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

119

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (120)

AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

Important SRS precautionsThe SRS is designed to work withthe safety belt to help protect thedriver and right front passengerfrom certain upper body injuries.Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;there is a risk of injury from adeploying airbag.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the backseat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)

between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

120

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (121)

Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.

Ford Motor Company recommends that an authorized dealerinspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved

in a collision. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steeringcolumn assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event ofa collision.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the steering column,its adaptive module, or its fuses. See your authorized dealer.

To properly position yourself away from the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.

Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placingobjects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those

objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causingserious injury.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbagsupplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized

dealer.

The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection toan occupant in the center front seating position.

Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow

hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing therisk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

121

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (122)

Children and airbagsChildren must always be properlyrestrained. Accident statisticssuggest that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the frontseating position. Failure to followthese instructions may increase therisk of injury in a collision.

Airbags can kill or injure achild in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing childseat in front of an active airbag. Ifyou must use a forward-facingchild seat in the front seat, movethe seat all the way back.

How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?The airbag SRS is designed toactivate when the vehicle sustainslongitudinal deceleration sufficientto cause the sensors to close anelectrical circuit that initiates airbaginflation.

The fact that the airbags did notinflate in a collision does not meanthat something is wrong with thesystem. Rather, it means the forceswere not of the type sufficient tocause activation. Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate infrontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, orrear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinaldeceleration.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

122

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (123)

The airbags inflate and deflaterapidly upon activation. After airbagdeployment, it is normal to notice asmoke-like, powdery residue orsmell the burnt propellant. This mayconsist of cornstarch, talcumpowder (to lubricate the bag) orsodium compounds (e.g., bakingsoda) that result from thecombustion process that inflates theairbag. Small amounts of sodiumhydroxide may be present whichmay irritate the skin and eyes, butnone of the residue is toxic.

While the system is designed to helpreduce serious injuries, contact witha deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporaryhearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerableforce, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants whoare not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the timeof airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants beproperly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible whilemaintaining vehicle control.

The SRS consists of the following items:

• Driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators andairbags)

• safety belt pretensioners

• Front passenger sensing system

• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer toFront passenger sensing system. later in this chapter.

• Driver and passenger side airbags (if equipped)

• One or more impact and safing sensors

• A readiness light and tone

• A diagnostic module

• The electrical wiring which connects the components

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

123

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (124)

The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as thesupplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impactsensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbagback up power and the airbag ignitors.

Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do nottouch them after inflation.

If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not functionagain and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not

replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an accident, they willnot function again ( belt will not extract or retract) and must be

replaced immediately. Failure to replace the retractor assemblies willincrease the risk of injury.

Front passenger sensing systemThe front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatoryrequirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontalairbag under certain conditions.

The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed todetect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if thefront passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) ordisabled (will not inflate).

The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects inthe front seat,

• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infantseat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,

• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facingchild restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions,

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

124

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (125)

• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period oftime,

For side airbag equipped vehicles, the front passenger sensing systemwill turn off the passenger seat side airbag if:

• the seat is empty and safety belt is unbuckled.

The front passenger sensing systemuses a �passenger airbag off� or�pass airbag off� indicator which willilluminate and stay lit to remind youthat the front passenger frontalairbag is disabled. The indicatorlamp is located on the instrument panel to the right of the radio over theglove box.

Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time whenthe ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional.

When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in theevent that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), theindicator lamp will be unlit.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will notinflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infantseat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.

• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminateand stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag isdisabled.

• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is notlit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from thevehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.

• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

125

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (126)

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the�passenger airbag off� or �pass airbag off� indicator lamp is lit, it ispossible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the

full upright position.• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,

with the person’s legs comfortably extended.• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for

about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that personand enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.

• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should beadvised to ride in the rear seat.

OccupantPass Airbag Off

Indicator LampPassenger Airbag

Empty seat Unlit DisabledSmall child in childsafety seat or booster

Lit Disabled

Small child with safetybelt buckled orunbuckled

Lit Disabled

Adult Unlit Enabled

Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12 and undershould be properly restrained in the back seat.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’svery important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seatedoccupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on theseat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sittingimproperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance ofinjury during a crash is greatly increased.

Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclinedtoo far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the

decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in seriousinjury or death in a crash.Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

126

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (127)

The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objectsplaced on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the frontpassenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though thepassenger airbag is disabled, the �pass airbag off� lamp may or may notbe illuminated according to the table below.

ObjectsPass Airbag Off

Indicator LampPassenger Airbag

Small (i.e. 3 ringbinder, small purse,bottled water)

Unlit Disabled

Medium (i.e. heavybriefcase, fully packedluggage)

Lit Disabled

Empty seat, or smallto medium object withsafety belt buckled

Lit Disabled

If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp isincorrect, check for the following:

• Objects lodged underneath the seat

• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (ifequipped)

• Objects hanging off the seat back

• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)

• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap

• Cargo interference with the seat

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat

• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat

The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seatedoccupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensingsystem. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier orlighter due to the conditions described in the list above.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

127

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (128)

To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or

hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or betweenthe seat and the center console (if equipped).Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp forproper airbag Status.Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the frontpassenger seat sensing system.

In case there is a problem with thefront passenger sensing system, theairbag readiness lamp in theinstrument cluster will stay lit.

If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:

The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects thatmay be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interferingwith the seat.

If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please takethe following steps to remove the obstruction:

• Pull the vehicle over.

• Turn the vehicle off.

• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodgedunderneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).

• Restart the vehicle.

• Wait at least 2 minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is nolonger illuminated

• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/notbe a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.

DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicleimmediately to an authorized dealer.

The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection toan occupant in the center seating position.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

128

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (129)

An out of position front center occupant could affect thedecision of the front passenger sensing system.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer

Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.

Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat mayaffect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone toindicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness sectionin the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag isnot required.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:

• The readiness light will eitherflash or stay lit.

• The readiness light will notilluminate immediately afterignition is turned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeatperiodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS servicedat an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may notfunction properly in the event of a collision.

Seat-mounted side airbag system (if equipped)

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbagcover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front

seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failureto follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

129

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (130)

Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seatcovers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and

increase the risk of injury in an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injureyou as it deploys from the side of the seatback.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, itsfuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your

authorized dealer.

All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety beltseven when an airbag SRS is provided.

How does the side airbag system work?The design and development of theside airbag system includedrecommended testing proceduresthat were developed by a group ofautomotive safety experts known asthe Side Airbag Technical WorkingGroup. These recommended testingprocedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment ofside airbags.

The side airbag system consists ofthe following:

• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)with a gas generator concealedbehind the outboard bolster ofthe driver and front passengerseatbacks.

• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used

for the front airbags.• Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle.Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk ofsevere injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

130

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (131)

The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of thefront seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected bythe collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate betweenthe door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection providedoccupants in side impact collisions.The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateraldeceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuitthat initiates airbag inflation.The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces werenot of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designedto inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal ornear-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateraldeceleration.

Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do nottouch them after inflation.

If the side airbag hasdeployed, the airbag will

not function again. The sideairbag system (including theseat) must be inspected andserviced by an authorizeddealer. If the airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area willincrease the risk of injury in acollision.

Determining if the system is operationalThe SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone toindicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readinesssection in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of theside airbag is not required.A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either

flash or stay lit.• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is

turned on.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

131

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (132)

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeatperiodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS servicedat your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system maynot function properly in the event of a collision.

Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles(including pretensioners)See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualifiedpersonnel.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDRENSee the following sections for directions on how to properly use safetyrestraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.

Important child restraint precautionsYou are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years oldor younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, youmust put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many statesrequire that children use approved booster seats until they are eightyears old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specificrequirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. Whenpossible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of yourvehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while thevehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from

injury in a collision.

Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant orchild restraint you might use.

Children and safety beltsIf the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.

Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by yourchild safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.

Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions thatapply to adult passengers in your vehicle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

132

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (133)

If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt canbe positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the childcloser to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.

Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended inyour vehicle.

Child booster seatsChildren outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulderbelt will provide some protection, these children are still too small forlap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of seriousinjury in a crash.

To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children whohave outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends useof a belt-positioning booster.

Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift thechild up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the kneesbend comfortably. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fitbetter and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of theshoulder.

When children should use booster seatsChildren need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow thetoddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat andlap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).

Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of thesequestions:

• Can the child sit all the way backagainst the vehicle seat back withknees bent comfortably at theedge of the seat withoutslouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

133

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (134)

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

Types of booster seats

There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:

• Those that are backless.

If your backless booster seat has aremovable shield, remove theshield and use the lap/shoulderbelt. If a seating position has alow seat back and no headrestraint, a backless booster seatmay place your child’s head (topof ear level) above the top of theseat. In this case, move thebackless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.

• Those with a high back.

If, with a backless booster seat,you cannot find a seating positionthat adequately supports yourchild’s head, a high back boosterseat would be a better choice.

Either type can be used at any seating position equipped withlap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

134

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (135)

Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose abooster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never upacross the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross thechest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawingsbelow compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortablyclose to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized meshsold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve thiscondition.

The importance of shoulder belts

Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’shead hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you shouldnever use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a boosterseat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for childrento ride.

Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder beltdoes not stay positioned on the shoulder during use.

Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of thebooster seat.

Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind theback because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of

the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

135

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (136)

Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They canslide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a

collision.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seatsUse a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of thechild. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with thesafety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use thesafety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop orcollision.

When installing a child safety seat:

• Review and follow the informationpresented in the Airbagsupplemental restraint system(SRS) section in this chapter.

• Use the correct safety belt bucklefor that seating position (thebuckle closest to the direction thetongue is coming from).

• Insert the belt tongue into theproper buckle until you hear asnap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in thebuckle.

• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safetyseat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,to prevent accidental unbuckling.

• Place seat back in upright position.

• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automaticlocking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seatingpositions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.

• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to48 lb. (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used forchildren up to 60 lb. (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide uppertorso restraint for children up to 80 lb. (36 kg) using an upper torsoharness and a belt-positioning booster.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

136

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (137)

Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tetherstrap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH andtether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. Formore information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats withLATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in thischapter.

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions includedwith the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install

and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a suddenstop or collision.

Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placedin front of an active airbag.

Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulderbelts

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place arear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use

a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the wayback.

Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rearseat whenever possible.

1. Position the child safety seat in aseat with a combination lap andshoulder belt.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

137

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (138)

2. Pull down on the shoulder beltand then grasp the shoulder beltand lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder andlap belt portions together, route thetongue through the child seataccording to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. Be surethe belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into theproper buckle (the buckle closest tothe direction the tongue is comingfrom) for that seating position untilyou hear a snap and feel the latchengage. Make sure the tongue islatched securely by pulling on it.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

138

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (139)

5. To put the retractor in theautomatic locking mode, grasp theshoulder portion of the belt and pulldownward until all of the belt ispulled out and a click is heard.

6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate itis in the automatic locking mode.

7. Pull the lap belt portion acrossthe child seat toward the buckle andpull up on the shoulder belt whilepushing down with your knee on thechild seat.

8. Allow the safety belt to retract toremove any slack in the belt.

9. Before placing the child in theseat, forcibly move the seat forwardand back to make sure the seat issecurely held in place. To checkthis, grab the seat at the belt pathand attempt to move it side to sideand forward. There should be nomore than one inch of movement forproper installation.

10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor isin the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more beltout). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2through 9.

Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

139

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (140)

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap whichgoes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tetherstraps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contactthe manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering atether strap.

The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strapanchors located behind the seats as described below.

The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover markedwith the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).

The tether strap anchors in yourvehicle are in the following positions(shown from top view):

Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor asshown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached

somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.

2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.

For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap underthe head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Locate the correct anchor for theselected seating position.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

140

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (141)

4. Open the tether anchor cover.

5. Clip the tether strap to theanchor as shown.

If the tether strap is clippedincorrectly, the child safety

seat may not be retained properlyin the event of a collision.

6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safetybelts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.

7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a childbeing injured in a collision greatly increases.

Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) attachments

Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attachthe child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must alsobe attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats withtether straps in this chapter.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

141

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (142)

Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seatingpositions marked with the child seat symbol.

The anchors on both sides of thecenter of the rear seat are providedfor child seats at the outboard seats,and are further apart than the pairsof lower anchors for child seatinstallation at other seats. DO NOTinstall child seats with LATCHattachments (rigid or mounted on belt webbing) to the lower anchors atthe center rear seat. If you install a child seat at the center rear position,use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor.

Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. Ina crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child

safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install achild seat with LATCH attachments.

Attach LATCH lowerattachments of the child

seat only to the anchors shown.

If you install a child seat with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tightenthe tether strap enough to lift thechild seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it.Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat.Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the bestprotection in a severe crash.

Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properlyattached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the childseat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see ifthe anchors hold the seat in place.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a childbeing injured in a crash greatly increases.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints

142

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (143)

INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADINGNew vehicles are fitted with tiresthat have a rating on them calledTire Quality Grades. The Qualitygrades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the UnitedStates Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passengercars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined inTitle 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give youthe following information about tire grades exactly as the governmenthas written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

143

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (144)

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required bylaw.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

TIRESTires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but theymust be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.

Glossary of tire terminology• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,

recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehiclecan carry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall ofeach tire providing information about the tire brand andmanufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referredto as DOT code.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a

maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasingthe inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’sload carrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry aheavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

144

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (145)

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increasethe tire’s load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).

• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure foundon the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located onthe B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind thefront door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assemblyupon which the tire beads are seated.

INFLATING YOUR TIRESSafe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properlyinflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressurewithout appearing flat.

Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than theothers, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust ifrequired.

At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and checkthe tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflateall tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are stronglyurged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service stationgauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital ordial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tireperformance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may causeuneven treadwear patterns.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

145

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (146)

Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures andmay result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or �blowout�,

with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also mayresult in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle controland accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and notappear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressureeven if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information foundon the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found onthe Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is locatedon the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tirepressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way your vehicle handles.Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’smaximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which themaximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normallyhigher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressurewhich can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or TireLabel which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than therecommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label orTire Label.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures alsochange. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding dropof 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressuresfrequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be foundon the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.

To check the pressure in your tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from drivingeven a mile.

If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven morethan 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires arehot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase aboverecommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended coldinflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), checkand record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

146

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (147)

when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the airpressure inside to go up as you drive.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tiregauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than theother tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare

Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at60psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar

Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store andmaintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shownon the Tire Label.

6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or otherobjects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an airleak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.

TIRE CARE

Inspecting your tires

Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in thetread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage fromthe tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls forcracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. Ifinternal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted andinspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not beused because they are more likely to blow out or fail.

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wearabnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, andreplace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

147

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (148)

Tire wearWhen the tread is worn down to1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires mustbe replaced to help prevent yourvehicle from skidding andhydroplaning. Built-in treadwearindicators, or “wear bars”, whichlook like narrow strips of smoothrubber across the tread will appearon the tire when the tread is worndown to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).When the tire tread wears down tothe same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must bereplaced.DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such asbulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspectedhave the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damagedduring off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is alsorecommended.

AgeTires degrade over time depending on many factors such as

weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of treadwear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to bereplaced more frequently.You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires orafter six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics ofthe tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number forsafety standard certification and in case of a recall.This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets allfederal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

148

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (149)

designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire sizecode and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire wasbuilt. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used fortraceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defectrequires a recall.

Tire replacement requirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride andhandling capability.

Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size,load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus

LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally providedby Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on eitherthe Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this informationis not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer.Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect thesafety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injuryand death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheelscould cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transferunit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see anauthorized dealer.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

149

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (150)

When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should notexceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the

tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If thebeads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate andtry again.When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greaterthan the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:

1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximumpressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do themounting.Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the personinflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheelassembly.

Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the roadtires are replaced on your vehicle.It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally bereplaced as a pair.The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed onyour vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.

The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Companymay affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or somecomponent of the TPMS may be damaged.

Safety practicesDriving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.

• Observe posted speed limits

• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

• Avoid potholes and objects on the road

• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

150

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (151)

If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidlyspin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an

explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.

Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires mayfail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Highway hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that youmay eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, butyour safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or yoususpect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce yourspeed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop andinspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. Ifyou cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repairfacility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

Tire and wheel alignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of yourvehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If yourvehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may beout of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignmentperiodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapidtreadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rearsuspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.

The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire andwheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

Tire rotationRotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in thescheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) willhelp your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance andlonger tire life.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

151

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (152)

• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)vehicles/Four Wheel Drive(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)vehicles (front tires at top ofdiagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to checkfor and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanicalproblem involved before tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. Adissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that isdifferent in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. Ifyou have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary useonly and should not be used in a tire rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checkedand adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics ofthe tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number forsafety standard certification and in case of a recall.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

152

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (153)

Information on “P” type tiresP215/65R15 95H is an example of atire size, load index and speedrating. The definitions of theseitems are listed below. (Note thatthe tire size, load index and speedrating for your vehicle may bedifferent from this example.)

1. P: Indicates a tire, designated bythe Tire and Rim Association(T&RA), that may be used forservice on cars, SUVs, minivans andlight trucks.

Note: If your tire size does notbegin with a letter this may mean itis designated by either ETRTO(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan TireManufacturing Association).2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters fromsidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, thewider the tire.3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height towidth.4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change yourwheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheeldiameter.

6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to howmuch weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in yourOwner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is notrequired by federal law.

7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes thespeed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods oftime under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tireson your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflationpressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the differencein conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

153

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (154)

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is notrequired by federal law.

Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)

M 81 mph (130 km/h)N 87 mph (140 km/h)Q 99 mph (159 km/h)R 106 mph (171 km/h)S 112 mph (180 km/h)T 118 mph (190 km/h)U 124 mph (200 km/h)H 130 mph (210 km/h)V 149 mph (240 km/h)W 168 mph (270 km/h)Y 186 mph (299 km/h)

Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those witha maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tiremanufacturers always use the letters ZR.

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with theletters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. Thenext two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it wasmanufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbersgo to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. Thenumbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number ofplies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread andsidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in thetire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety ComplianceCertification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

154

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (155)

12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.

• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel.

13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tiremanufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure atwhich the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure isnormally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflationpressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower thanthe recommended pressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings suchas standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

155

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (156)

Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” typetires“LT” type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of “P”type tires; these differences aredescribed below:

1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated bythe Tire and Rim Association(T&RA), that is intended for serviceon light trucks.

2. Load Range/Load InflationLimits: Indicates the tire’sload-carrying capabilities and itsinflation limits.

3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (atotal of six or more tires on the vehicle).

4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

156

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (157)

Information on “T” type tires“T” type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of “P”type tires; these differences aredescribed below:

T145/80D16 is an example of a tiresize.

Note: The temporary tire size foryour vehicle may be different fromthis example.

1. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation (T&RA), that isintended for temporary service oncars, SUVs, minivans and lighttrucks.

2. 145: Indicates the nominal widthof the tire in millimeters fromsidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, thewider the tire.

3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height towidth. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.

4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change yourwheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheeldiameter.

Location of the tire label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire sizeand other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge ofthe driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in theVehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

157

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (158)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

158

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (159)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCCrules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute formanually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be

checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, seeInflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain yourtire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Changing tires with TPMS

Each road tire is equipped witha tire pressure sensor fastenedto the inside rim of the wheel.The pressure sensor is coveredby the tire and is not visibleunless the tire is removed. Thepressure sensor is locatedopposite (180 degrees) from thevalve stem. Care must be takenwhen changing the tire to avoiddamaging the sensor. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizeddealer.

The tire pressure should be checkedperiodically (at least monthly) usingan accurate tire gauge, refer toInflating your tires in this chapter.

Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your fourroad tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The LowTire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to beinflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if thelight turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure stillneeds to be checked.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

159

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (160)

When your temporary spare tire is installed

When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporaryspare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind youthat the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back onyour vehicle. This includes the optional full-sized matching spare wheeland tire, as it is intended for temporary use only.

To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on yourvehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMSin this section.

When you believe your system is not operating properly

The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn youwhen your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system isno longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to thefollowing chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

160

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (161)

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

Possible cause Customer Action Required

Solid Warning Light Tire(s)under-inflated

1. Check your tire pressure toensure tires are properlyinflated; refer to Inflating

your tires in this chapter.2. After inflating your tires tothe manufacturer’srecommended inflationpressure as shown on the TireLabel (located on the edge ofdriver’s door or the B-Pillar),the vehicle must be driven forat least two minutes over20 mph (32 km/h) before thelight will turn OFF.

Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is inuse. (This includes the optionalfull-sized matching wheel andtire). Repair the damaged roadwheel/tire and reinstall it onthe vehicle to restore systemfunctionality. For a descriptionon how the system functions,refer to When your temporary

spare tire is installed in thissection.

TPMSmalfunction

If your tires are properlyinflated and your spare tire isnot in use and the lightremains ON, have the systeminspected by your authorizeddealer.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

161

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (162)

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

Possible cause Customer Action Required

Flashing WarningLight

Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is inuse. (This includes the optionalfull-sized matching wheel andtire). Repair the damaged roadwheel and re-mount it on thevehicle to restore systemfunctionality. For a descriptionof how the system functionsunder these conditions, refer toWhen your temporary spare

tire is installed in this section.TPMSmalfunction

If your tires are properlyinflated and your spare tire isnot in use and the TPMSwarning light still flashes, havethe system inspected by yourauthorized dealer.

When inflating your tiresWhen putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in yourgarage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respondimmediately to the air added to your tires.

It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for thelight to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommendedinflation pressure.

How temperature affects your tire pressureThe Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure ineach pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typicalpassenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationaryover night with the outside temperature significantly lower than thedaytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. Thislower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantlylower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMSwarning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

162

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (163)

ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or moretires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. Ifany tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearestlocation where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS

Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires youcurrently have on your vehicle.

The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction inrain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snowtires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steelwheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chipaluminum wheels.Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:• Either cable type chains or SAE class S chains can be used.• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any

wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your

vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, removethe chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use

tire chains on dry roads.• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle

damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle whenusing snow tires and chains.

VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILERThis section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design ratingcapability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loadingyour vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determiningyour vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’sTire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank offuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, oroptional equipment.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

163

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (164)

Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when youpicked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarketequipment.

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that thevehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be foundon the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a TireLabel). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS ANDCARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” formaximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximumpayload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarketor authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on thevehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from thepayload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.

The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limitedeither by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by

payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Onceyou have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not addmore cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperlyloading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control andvehicle rollover.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

164

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (165)

Example only:

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue loadweight is also part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

165

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (166)

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Thesenumbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Labellocated on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The totalload on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found inthis chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by yourauthorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) – is the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle (including all options,equipment, passengers and cargo).The GVWR is shown on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel located on the B-Pillar orthe edge of the driver’s door.The GVW must never exceed theGVWR.

Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicleweight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling

or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, seriousdamage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

166

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (167)

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo andpassengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation atGVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safecontrol of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towingvehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. TheGCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of afully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with onlymandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consultyour authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guideprovided by your authorized dealer) for more detailedinformation.

Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.

Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacitiesthan the original tires because they may lower the vehicle’s

GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limitthan the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWRlimitations.

Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result inserious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

167

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (168)

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXXkg or XXX lbs.4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity:

• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo andluggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You andfour friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weighapproximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you haveenough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends andyour golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo andluggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick upcement from the local home improvement store to finish that patioyou have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside ofthe vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity totransport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enoughcargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, thecalculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, thenthe load calculation would be:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

168

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (169)

1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you havethe load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) -(9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.

The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in yourvehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.

TRAILER TOWINGYour vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. Do not tow atrailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km).Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these componentscarefully after towing.

Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 1,500 lb. (680 kg). Donot exceed the GVWR specified on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label.

Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailerweight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in

engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6,600 lb.(2,993 kg).

Preparing to towUse the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it isproperly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or areliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.

HitchesDo not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a loadcarrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.

Safety chainsAlways connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainersof the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross thechains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

169

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (170)

If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agencygives to you.Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.

Trailer brakesElectric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes aresafe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’sspecifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federalregulations.

Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to yourvehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough

braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at theGVWR not GCWR.

Trailer lampsTrailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all runninglights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See yourauthorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions andequipment for hooking up trailer lamps.

Driving while you towWhen towing a trailer:• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first

500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttlestarts.

• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut offautomatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.

• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist

in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer toUnderstanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatictransmission in the Driving chapter.

• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.

Servicing after towingIf you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require morefrequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenanceinformation for more information.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

170

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (171)

Trailer towing tips• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to

get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, makewider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.

• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do

not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and becomeless effective.

• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailerweight.

• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hillyconditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, considerrefilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already soequipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter forthe lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axlelube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of anew vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be doneat no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.

• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check yourhitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.

• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hotweather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you mustpark on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.

Launching or retrieving a boatDisconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailerinto the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after thetrailer is removed from the water.

When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:

• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge ofthe rear bumper.

• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above thebottom edge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:

• causing internal damage to the components.

• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

171

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (172)

Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged inwater. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repair required.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to towyour vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind arecreational vehicle).

These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is notdamaged due to insufficient lubrication.

All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles:

This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheeldrive capability.

• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)

• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)

If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) mustbe exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford Motor Companyrecommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualifiedtechnician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer fordriveshaft removal/installation.

Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can causetransmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internaltransmission components.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

172

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (173)

STARTING

Positions of the ignition1. OFF/LOCK, shuts off the engineand all accessories/locks thegearshift lever and allows keyremoval.

2. ACC, allows the electricalaccessories such as the radio tooperate while the engine is notrunning.

3. ON, all electrical circuitsoperational. Warning lightsilluminated. Key position when driving.4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the enginestarts.

Preparing to start your vehicleEngine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. Thissystem meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standardrequirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radionoise.When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the acceleratorbefore or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you havedifficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting thevehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.

Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk

of fire or other damage.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dryground cover. The emission system heats up the engine

compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosedareas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door

before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes inthis chapter for more instructions.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

173

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (174)

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealerinspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell

exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal inorder to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.

Before starting the vehicle:

1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. Formore information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to theSeating and Safety Restraints chapter.

2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.

3. Make sure the gearshift is in P(Park).

4. Make sure the parking brake isset.

HOOD

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

174

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (175)

5. Turn the key to 3 (ON) withoutturning the key to 4 (START).

Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights andchimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more informationregarding the warning lights.

Starting the engine1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) withoutturning the key to 4 (START).

2. Turn the key to 4 (START), thenrelease the key as soon as theengine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter.

Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine stillfails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this willallow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine isflooded with fuel.

Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). Ifsummer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, you mayexperience increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation until theengine has warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor for the availability ofwinter grade ethanol.Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time as starterdamage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to OFF andwait 30 seconds before trying again.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

175

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (176)

Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Suchfluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possiblepersonal injury.

If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine blockheater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank willimprove cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operateon E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.

See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specificationschapter for more information on ethanol.

Hot weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)If you are experiencing a rough or rolling idle after start-up with theoutside temperature above 80°F (27°C), the idle should improve within10 to 30 seconds. If the problems persist below this temperature, seeyour authorized dealer.

If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions(flexible fuel vehicles only)1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, thencrank the engine.

2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release theaccelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,repeat Step 1.

Guarding against exhaust fumesCarbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoidits dangerous effects.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealerinspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell

exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating informationIf the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period oftime, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heatingor air conditioning to bring in fresh air.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

176

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (177)

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in startingand allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicleis equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater elementwhich is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allowsthe user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electricalsource. The block heater system is most effective when outdoortemperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).

Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result inproperty damage or physical harm.

To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heaterwith ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)

adapters.

Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations forproper and safe operation:• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product

certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be usedoutdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked �Suitable for Usewith Outdoor Appliances.� Never use an indoor extension cordoutdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.

• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.• Use as short an extension cord as possible.• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord

which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord tothe outlet without stretching.

• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (notpatched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors attemperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorateextension cords over a period of time.

• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in goodcondition before use.

• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engineblock heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in orderto prevent possible shock or fire.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

177

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (178)

• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear ofall combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper andsimilar items.

• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cordare solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord tobecome very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sureto check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the systemhas been operating for approximately a half hour.

• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your falltune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.

How to use the engine block heater

Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To cleanthem, use a dry cloth.

Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine blockheater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 wattsof energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does nothave a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained afterapproximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily useadditional electricity.

Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving thevehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals theprongs of the engine block heater cord plug.

BRAKES

Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled

maintenance information for scheduled maintenance.

Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate aperformance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normaloperation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittentsqueal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises areusually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can beaggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake liningsmay be worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

178

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (179)

Refer to Brake system warninglight in the Instrument Clusterchapter for information on the brakesystem warning light.

If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat

and become less effective.

Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on thewheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does notcontribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials withemphasis on improved performance and environmental considerationscan lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned byweekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits canbe removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noisefrom the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may beobserved during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noisewhile braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet orsnowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’santi-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudderin the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized dealer.

The ABS operates by detecting theonset of wheel lockup during brakeapplications and compensates forthis tendency. The wheels areprevented from locking even whenthe brakes are firmly applied. Theaccompanying illustration depictsthe advantage of an ABS equippedvehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABSequipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front brakingtraction.

P!BRAKE

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

179

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (180)

Using ABS

• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheelABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheelABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain steeringcontrol of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, willenable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlledstop.

• The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leaveenough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you tostop.

• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this brakingtechnique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.

ABS warning lampThe ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster momentarilyilluminates when the ignition isturned on. If the light does notilluminate momentarily at start up,remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced.

With the ABS light on, the anti-lockbrake system is disabled and normalbraking is still effective unless thebrake warning light also remainsilluminated with parking brakereleased. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicleserviced immediately.)

Parking brake with auto-release (if equipped)Apply the parking brake wheneverthe vehicle is parked.

To set the parking brake:

1. Move the gearshift to P (Park).

2. Push pedal downward.

ABS

P!BRAKE

HOOD

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

180

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (181)

The BRAKE warning lamp in theinstrument cluster illuminates andremains illuminated (when theignition is turned ON) until theparking brake is fully released.

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift islatched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position

and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stopyour vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only therear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic parking brake release.To release the parking brake:1. Start the vehicle.2. Press the brake pedal.3. Move the gearshift from the P (Park) position to one of the forwardgears (the parking brake will not release automatically when you shiftinto reverse). The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift ismoved.

If the parking brake fails to releaseafter completing this procedure, usethe manual parking brake releaselever.

Pull the lever to manually releasethe parking brake.

TRACTION CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional Traction Control™system. This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability ofyour vehicle. It is especially useful on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces.The system operates by detecting and controlling wheel spin. The systemborrows many of the electronic and mechanical elements already presentin the anti-lock braking system (ABS).

P!BRAKE

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

181

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (182)

Wheel-speed sensors allow excess rear wheel spin to be detected by theTraction Control™ portion of the ABS computer. Any excessive wheelspin is controlled by automatically applying and releasing the rear brakesin conjunction with engine torque reductions. Engine torque reduction isrealized via the fully electronic spark and fuel injection systems. Thisprocess is very sensitive to driving conditions and very fast acting. Therear wheels “search” for optimum traction several times a second andadjustments are made accordingly.

Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal

injury or property damage. The occurrence of an Traction Control™event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceededtheir ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of lossof vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If youexperience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.

The Traction Control™ system will allow your vehicle to make better useof available traction on slippery surfaces while you are trying toaccelerate or while your foot is on the accelerator pedal. The system is adriver aid which makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on snowand ice covered roads.

During Traction Control™ operation you may hear an electric motor typeof sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine will not“rev-up” when you push further on the accelerator. This is normalsystem behavior.

If you should become stuck in snowor ice or on a very slippery roadsurface, try switching the TractionControl™ system off. This mayallow excess wheel spin to “dig” thevehicle out and enable a successful“rocking” maneuver.

The traction control indicatorflashes during a Traction Control™system event.

If the traction control indicatorcomes on and stays lit, either:

• the Traction Control™ systemrequires service by an authorized dealer, or

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

182

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (183)

• the customer has disabled the system using the traction control switchlocated on the left side of the instrument panel.

The Traction Control™ system will be on every time you turn theignition key from OFF to ON until you deactivate the system using thetraction control switch on the instrument panel left of the steeringcolumn.

STEERING

Ford Motor Company recommends that an authorized dealerinspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved

in a collision. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steeringcolumn assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event ofa collision.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the steering column,its adaptive module, or its fuses. See your authorized dealer.

To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold thesteering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more thana few seconds when the engine is running.

It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in thepower steering fluid reservoir:

• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).

• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, checkfor low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by yourauthorized dealer.

• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steeringpump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level beforeseeking service by your authorized dealer.

• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark onthe reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turnedoff), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

• an improperly inflated tire

• uneven tire wear

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

183

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (184)

• loose or worn suspension components

• loose or worn steering components

• improper steering alignment

Speed sensitive steeringThe steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At high speeds, steeringassist will decrease to improve steering feel. At lower speeds,maneuverability will be increased.

If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes whiledriving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering systemchecked by your authorized dealer.

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling andgeneral vehicle performance during:

• Certain road conditions

• Steering maneuvers

• Braking

• Accelerations

This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level byautomatically adding air or releasing air from the springs.

If you exceed the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate.

The air suspension shut-off switch islocated on the left side of the trunk.If this switch is in the OFF position,the rear air suspension will notoperate.

On vehicles equipped withAir Suspension, turn OFF

the Air Suspension switch prior tojacking, hoisting or towing yourvehicle.

Normal vehicle operation does notrequire any action by the driver.

AIR SUSPENSIONSWITCH

INTERRUPTEUR DELA SUSPENSIONPNEUMATIQUE

WARNING

AVERTISsem*nTOFF-ARRET

To prevent sudden vehicle movement, turn off air suspen-sion switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing vehicle.

Pour prévenir tout mouvement soudain du véhi-cule, placer à l'arrêt l'interrupteur de la suspension pneumatique avant de lever le véhicule (cric ou pont élévateur) ou de le remorquer.

OFF

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

184

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (185)

TRACTION-LOK™ AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly whenone wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, theTraction-Lok™ axle functions like a standard rear axle.Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on aTraction-Lok™ rear axle could result in a permanent reduction ineffectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal drivingand should not be noticeable to the driver.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION

Brake-shift interlock – column-shift transmissionThis vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that preventsthe gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition isin the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition inthe ON position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fusehas blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Referto Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to 2 (ACC).

2. Locate the access plug on theunderside of the steering columncover.

3. Remove the access plug using a flat head screwdriver. Insert thescrewdriver into the access hole nearest the steering wheel. Then pushand hold the override button using a flat head screwdriver. Apply thebrake pedal and shift the transmission into N (Neutral) while continuingto depress the override button.

4. Reinstall the access plug cover, start the vehicle and release theparking brake.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

185

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (186)

Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelampsare working.

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift islatched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position

and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lampremains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.

See your authorized dealer.

Brake-shift interlock – floor-shift transmission

This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that preventsthe gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition isin the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition inthe ON position and the brake pedal depressed:

1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove thekey.

2. Insert the key and turn it to ACC. Apply the brake pedal and shift

to N (Neutral).

When the key is in the ignition and in the ACC position, theautomatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwantedvehicle movement, always set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are notoperating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the RoadsideEmergencies chapter.

Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelampsare working.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

186

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (187)

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift islatched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and

remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lampremains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.

See your authorized dealer.

Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatictransmission

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels fromturning.

To put your vehicle in gear:

• Start the engine

• Depress the brake pedal

• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear

To put your vehicle in P (Park):

• Come to a complete stop

• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift islatched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and

remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R(Reverse).

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

187

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (188)

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and isfree to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.

(Overdrive)

The normal driving position for thebest fuel economy. Transmissionoperates in gears one through four.

If your vehicle is equipped with acolumn-shift transmission, overdrivecan be deactivated by pressing thetransmission control switch on thegearshift lever.

If your vehicle is equipped with afloor-shift transmission, overdrivecan be deactivated by pressing thetransmission control switch on thegearshift handle.

The transmission control indicatorlight (TCIL) will illuminate on theinstrument cluster.

Drive (not shown)

Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.

• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.

• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.

• Provides engine braking.

• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D toother gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailertowing and when engine braking is required.

• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission controlswitch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.

O/DOFF

O/DOFF

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

188

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (189)

• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turnedoff.

2 (Second)

This position allows for second gear only.

• Provides engine braking.

• Use to start-up on slippery roads.

• To return to (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the(Overdrive) position.

• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission todownshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.

1 (First)

• Provides maximum engine braking.

• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.

• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)when vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Forced downshifts

• Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.

• Depress the accelerator to the floor.

• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out byshifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in asteady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

189

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (190)

DRIVING THROUGH WATERIf driving through deep or standingwater is unavoidable, proceed veryslowly especially when the depth isnot known. Never drive throughwater that is higher than the bottomof the wheel rims (for cars) or thebottom of the hubs (for trucks).

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage yourengine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water wherethe transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into thetransmission and cause internal transmission damage.

Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving yourvehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Driving

190

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (191)

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Getting roadside assistanceTo fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford MotorCompany offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. Thisprogram is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The serviceis available:

• 24–hours, seven days a week

• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Cardincluded in your Owner Guide portfolio.

Roadside assistance will cover:

• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have beensupplied with a tire inflation kit)

• battery jump start

• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’sresponsibility)

• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited bystate, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) ofgasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fueldelivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a12-month period.

• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved orcounty maintained road, no recoveries.

• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorizeddealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to thenearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to anauthorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablementlocation, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs inexcess of 35 miles (56.3 km).

Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehiclerequires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for anyroadside services.

Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guidefor information on:

• coverage period

• exact fuel amounts

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

191

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (192)

• towing of your disabled vehicle

• emergency travel expense reimbursem*nt

• travel planning benefits

Using roadside assistance

Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in theOwner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card isfound in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.

U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.

Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call1–800–665–2006.

If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford MotorCompany will reimburse a reasonable amount and for towing to thenearest dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursem*nt information,U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1–800–241–3673; Lincolnvehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Customers will be asked tosubmit their original receipts.

Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursem*nt information, call1–800–665–2006.

Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty

In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistancecoverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contactingyour authorized dealer or by calling 1–800–FORD–CLUB.

Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, youmay purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s RoadsideAssistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHER

Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown,approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when theignition is off.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

192

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (193)

• The hazard lights control islocated on top of the steeringcolumn.

• Depress hazard lights control toactivate all hazard flasherssimultaneously.

• Depress control again to turn theflashers off.

FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUELRESET

The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electricfuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been activated.

The fuel pump shut-off switch islocated on the left side of the trunkbehind the left rear tail light and thetrunk liner.

Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.2. Check the fuel system for leaks.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

193

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (194)

3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch bypushing in on the reset button.

4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds andreturn the key to the OFF position.

5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.

FUSES AND RELAYS

FusesIf electrical components in thevehicle are not working, a fuse mayhave blown. Blown fuses areidentified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriatefuses before replacing any electricalcomponents.

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperagerating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wiredamage and could start a fire.

Standard fuse amperage rating and color

COLOR

Fuse

rating

Mini

fuses

Standard

fuses

Maxi

fuses

Cartridge

maxi

fuses

Fuse link

cartridge

2A Grey Grey — — —3A Violet Violet — — —4A Pink Pink — — —5A Tan Tan — — —

7.5A Brown Brown — — —10A Red Red — — —15A Blue Blue — — —20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue25A Natural Natural — — —30A Green Green Green Pink Pink40A — — Orange Green Green

15

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

194

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (195)

COLOR

Fuse

rating

Mini

fuses

Standard

fuses

Maxi

fuses

Cartridge

maxi

fuses

Fuse link

cartridge

50A — — Red Red Red60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow70A — — Tan — Brown80A — — Natural Black Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel bythe brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.

To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panelcover.

The fuses are coded as follows.

27 2526 24

23 2122

1920

18 1617 15

14 1213

10 33

31

29

32

30

28

119 7

8 65 3

41

2

Relay1

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

195

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (196)

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

Description

1 10A Ignition (START) - Starter relay coil,DTRS

2 7.5A Power mirrors, Door lock switches,Mirror switch, Keypad switch, Decklidswitch, Adjustable pedal switch, DDM,Cluster

3 5A Ignition (START) - Audio mute4 10A LCM (switch illumination), Autolamp

sensor5 7.5A Ignition (ON/ACC) - LCM6 7.5A LCM7 10A Ignition (ON/ACC) - Wiper module8 10A Electronic Automatic Temperature

Control (EATC) module (vehiclesequipped with EATC only)

9 7.5A Ignition (ON/ACC) - Door lock switchillumination, Heated seat switchillumination, Moon roof, Overheadconsole, Radio, Antenna,Electrochromatic mirror, Window relaycoil

10 15A Hazards11 15A Ignition (ON) - Turn signals12 15A Audio13 10A Ignition (ON) - Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) module, Rear Air SuspensionModule (RASM), Variable Assist PowerSteering (VAPS), Cluster

14 15A Adjustable pedals15 10A Ignition (ON) - EATC module, A/C mode

switch (vehicles equipped with manualA/C only), A/C blower relay coil

16 20A Cigar lighter, OBD II

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

196

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (197)

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

Description

17 10A Ignition (ON) - A/C mode switch(vehicles equipped with manual A/C),Blend door, Heated seat modules, BTSI(Floor-shift transmission)

18 15A Lighting control module (interiorlighting)

19 10A LCM (Left-hand low beam)20 10A Ignition (ON/START) - Back-up lamps21 10A LCM (Right-hand low beam)22 10A Ignition (ON/START) - Restraint Control

Module (RCM), Occupant ClassificationSensor (OCS), Passenger Air bagDeactivation Indicator (PADI)

23 15A Multi-function switch (Flash-to-pass),LCM (High beams)

24 10A Ignition (ON/START) - PassiveAnti-Theft System (PATS) module,Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relaycoil, Fuel relay coil, Ignition coil relaycoil

25 15A LCM (Park lamps, corner lamps, licenselamps)

26 10A Ignition (ON/START) - Cluster, LCM,Overdrive cancel switch

27 — Not used28 7.5A Brake signal, LCM (BTSI), ABS29 — Not used30 — Not used31 5A Key in (LCM)32 — Not used33 — Not used

Relay 1 Full ISO relay Window relay

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

197

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (198)

Power distribution box

The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. Thepower distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect yourvehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.

Always disconnect the battery before servicing high currentfuses.

To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover tothe Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or

refilling fluid reservoirs.

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to theBattery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box Description

1 30A* Ignition switch2 20A* Moon roof

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

198

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (199)

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box Description

3 10A* Powertrain Control Module (PCM) keepalive power, Canister vent

4 20A* Fuel relay feed5 10A* Rear Air Suspension Module (RASM),

VAPS6 15A* Alternator regulator7 30A* PCM relay feed8 20A* Driver’s Door Module (DDM)9 15A* Ignition coil relay feed

10 20A* Horn relay feed11 15A* A/C clutch relay feed12 20A* Audio (Subwoofer)13 20A* Instrument panel power point14 20A* Stop lamp switch15 15A* Foglamps16 20A* Heated seats17 — Not used18 — Not used19 15A* Injectors20 15A* PCM21 15A* Powertrain loads and sensors22 — Not used23 — Not used24 10A* Heated mirror, Rear defrost indicator

101 40A** Blower relay feed102 50A** Cooling fan103 50A** Instrument panel (I/P) fuse box feed #1

(I/P fuses 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18)104 50A** Instrument panel (I/P) fuse box feed #2

(I/P fuses 2, 4, 6, 8, 19, 21, 23 and 25)105 30A** Starter relay feed

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

199

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (200)

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box Description

106 40A** Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module(Pump)

107 40A** Rear defroster relay feed108 — Not used109 20A** ABS module (Valves)110 30A** Wiper module111 — Not used112 30A** Air suspension compressor113 — Not used114 — Not used115 — Not used116 — Not used117 — Not used118 — Not used201 1⁄2 ISO relay A/C clutch202 — Not used203 1⁄2 ISO relay Ignition coil204 1⁄2 ISO relay PCM205 1⁄2 ISO relay Foglamps206 1⁄2 ISO relay Fuel207 — Not used208 — Not used209 1⁄2 ISO relay Horn301 Full ISO relay Starter302 Full ISO relay Air compressor303 Full ISO relay Blower304 Full ISO relay Rear defrost relay501 Diode A/C clutch502 Diode PCM503 — Not used

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

200

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (201)

Fuse/Relay

Location

Fuse Amp

Rating

Power Distribution Box Description

601 20A Circuitbreaker

Power seats, Lumbar

602 20A Circuitbreaker

Power windows relay feed (RUN/ACC)

* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse

Relays

Relays are located in the power distribution box and should be replacedby an authorized dealer.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you get a flat tire while driving:

• do not brake heavily.

• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.

• hold the steering wheel firmly.

• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that isdifferent in one or more of the following: type, brand, size, speed ratingand tread design. If this is the case, this dissimilar spare tire is still ratedfor your vehicle loads (GAWR and GVWR). This temporary spare tire isnot equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light willilluminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality ofthe TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressuremonitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to preventdamage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels, and Loading chapter. Replace the sparetire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing ofthe flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor fordamage.

The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire PressureMonitoring System and should not be used.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

201

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (202)

Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tire,Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If the

tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longerfunction.

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increasedrisk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended fortemporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you shouldreplace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same sizeand type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided byFord. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should bereplaced rather than repaired.A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel thatis different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tiresize and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire hasa label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FORTEMPORARY USE ONLY”

When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:

• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on theSafety Compliance Label

• Tow a trailer

• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar sparetire

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time

• Use commercial car washing equipment

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheellocation can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

202

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (203)

• Comfort and noise• Ground clearance and parking at curbs• Winter weather driving capability• Wet weather driving capabilityFor vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehiclebe operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:

• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time• Use commercial car washing equipment• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare

tire/wheelThe usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking performance• Comfort and noise• Ground clearance and parking at curbs• Winter weather driving capability• Wet weather driving capability• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)

• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additionalcaution should be given to:

• Towing a trailer

• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body

• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack

Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel andseek service as soon as possible.

Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel InformationThis spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving withthe full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

203

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (204)

(113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if youneed to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.

Stopping and securing the vehicle1. Park on a level surface, set theparking brake and activate hazardflashers.

2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)and turn engine off.

Removing the spare tire and jack1. Remove the spare tire and thejack. The jack could be located:

• A — behind the mini spare tire or

• B — behind the full size sparetire

On vehicles equipped withAir Suspension, turn OFF

the Air Suspension switch prior tojacking, hoisting or towing yourvehicle.

Refer to Air suspension system inthe Driving chapter of the Owner’sGuide for more information.

HOOD

OFF

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

204

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (205)

2. Remove the lug wrench from thejack. Rotate the lug wrench socketout from the handle.

Tire change procedure

When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmissionalone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the

jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).

To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)

the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of thevehicle) to the tire being changed.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could beseriously injured.

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closeto moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

1. Block the diagonally oppositewheel.

A

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

205

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (206)

2. Locate pry off notch (ifequipped) and remove the centerornament from the aluminum wheelwith the tapered end of the wheelnut wrench that came with yourvehicle. Insert and twist the handle,then pry against the wheel.

3. If equipped with a fullwheelcover, remove the wheelcovercenter ornament then loosen the five black plastic nuts which retain thewheelcover using the lug wrench.

4. Loosen each wheel metal lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise butdo not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.

Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack locationmarkings:

JACK LOCATION

The jack location markings can befound on the lower outer edge ofthe body.

• Locate the jack locator mark (B)on the body (C) near the tire youare changing, then place the jack(D) under the frame (A) ofthe vehicle aligning it with themark (B).

• Position the jack according to thefollowing guides and turn the jackhandle clockwise until the wheelis completely off the ground.

A

D

B

C

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

206

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (207)

To lessen risk of personalinjury, do not put any part

of your body under the vehiclewhile changing a tire. Do not startthe engine when your vehicle ison the jack. The jack is ONLYmeant for changing the tire.

• Never use the rear differentialas a jacking point.

5. Remove the metal lug nuts with the lug wrench.6. Replace the flat tire/wheel assembly with the spare tire/wheelassembly, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall lugnuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lugnuts until the wheel has been lowered.

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

8. Remove the jack and fully tightenthe lug nuts in the order shown.Refer to Wheel lug nut torquespecifications later in this chapterfor the proper lug nut torquespecification.

9. For full size spare aluminumwheel, firmly install the centerornament. If equipped with a fullsize spare tire/wheel assembly andlug nut retained full wheelcover, install the wheelcover by tightening thefive black plastic nuts in the order shown on the wheelcover using thelug wrench with about 80 lb. in. (9 N•m) torque. Then firmly install thewheelcover center ornament.

10. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench away.

11. Turn on the air suspension switch (if equipped).

WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONSRetighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheelremoval, etc.).

1

43

25

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

207

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (208)

Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*

lb.ft. N•m1⁄2 x 20 100 135* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt andrust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt orforeign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel

or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc thatcontacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor tothe hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mountingsurfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metalcontact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts toloosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,resulting in loss of control.

Note: Inspect the wheel pilot holeprior to installation. If there isvisible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,remove loose particles by wipingwith clean rag and apply grease.Apply grease only to the wheel pilothole surface by smearing a “dime”(1 square cm) sized glob of greasearound the wheel pilot surface (1)with end of finger. DO NOT applygrease to lugnut/stud holes orwheel-to-brake surfaces.

JUMP STARTING

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or

vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes andclothing, if contacted.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

208

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (209)

Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmissionvehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-startcapability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatictransmission may cause transmission damage.

Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, theautomatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, thetransmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation isconsidered normal and will not affect function or durability of thetransmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully updatetransmission operation.

1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.

2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this coulddamage the vehicle’s electrical system.

3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehiclemaking sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake onboth vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other movingparts.

4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion beforeyou attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.

5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electricalsurges. Turn all other accessories off.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

209

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (210)

Connecting the jumper cables

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal ofthe discharged battery.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate theassisting (boosting) battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the assisting battery.

+–

+–

+–+–

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

210

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (211)

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of theassisting battery.

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposedmetal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and thecarburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold as grounding points.

Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an

explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts ofboth engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump starting1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine atmoderately increased speed.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

+–

+–

+–

+–

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

211

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (212)

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for anadditional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the jumper cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they wereconnected.

1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate theassisting (boosting) battery.

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of thebooster vehicle’s battery.

+–

+–

+–

+–

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

212

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (213)

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the boostervehicle’s battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of thedisabled vehicle’s battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cablesremoved, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer canrelearn its idle conditions.

+–

+–

+–

+–

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

213

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (214)

WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towingservice or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, yourroadside assistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbedequipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has notapproved a slingbelt towing procedure.

Before your vehicle can be towed, the air suspension control in theluggage compartment must be turned to the OFF position (if equipped).

If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicledamage may occur.

Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized towtruck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual forproper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

214

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (215)

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED

At homeYou must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealerfor warranty repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicleline will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to yourselling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continuedsatisfaction. Please note that certain warranty repairs require specialtraining and/or equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized toperform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on thewarranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to anotherauthorized dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repairafter taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be madeusing Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Ford.

If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service youare receiving, follow these steps:

1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at yourselling/servicing authorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the SalesManager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.

3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Companypolicies or procedures, please contact the Lincoln Mercury CustomerRelationship Center at 1-800-521-4140.

Away from homeIf you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home whenyour vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorizeddealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contactthe Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer tohelp you.

In the United States:

Ford Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 481211-800-392-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)www.customersaskford.com

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

215

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (216)

In Canada:Customer Relationship CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E41-800-565-3673 (FORD)www.ford.caIf you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicleneeds service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer couldprovide, after following the steps described above, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.In the United States:Ford Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 481211-800-521-4140(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)www.customersaskford.comIn Canada:Lincoln CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E41-800-387-9333www.lincolncanada.com

In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have thefollowing information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:

• Your telephone number (home and business)

• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorizeddealer is located

• The year and make of your vehicle

• The date of vehicle purchase

• The current odometer reading

• The vehicle identification number (VIN)

Additional AssistanceIf you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wishto contact the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE program (U.S.only).

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

216

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (217)

In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writingbefore pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is alsoallowed a final repair attempt in some states.In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBBAUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss WarrantyAct, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacementor repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This disputehandling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rightsor other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss WarrantyAct or state replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufactureror its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to thevehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number ofattempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace thevehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle andreimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid orpayable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumeruse). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturerhas had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to itsapplicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownershipof a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occursfirst:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformitylikely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (adefect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety ofthe vehicle) OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total ofmore than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify themanufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at thefollowing address:

Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

217

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (218)

THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM(U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful inachieving satisfaction by following the three-step procedure outlined onthe front page of the Warranty Guide. However, if your warranty concernhas not been resolved using the three-step procedure, you may beeligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation andarbitration. Initially, the BBB will try to resolve your question or concernthrough mediation. Mediation is a process through which arepresentative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore optionsfor settlement of your claim. If mediation is not successful, customerswith eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitrationprocess. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can presentyour case in an informal setting before an impartial person. Thearbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision afterthe hearing. You are not bound by the decision but may choose to acceptit. If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford mustabide by the accepted decision as well. If the arbitrator has decided inyour favor and you accept the decision, the BBB AUTO LINE programwill contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in atimely manner. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program areusually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.

To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE, you will be asked for yourname and address, general information about your new vehicle,information about your warranty concerns and any steps you havealready taken to try to resolve them. You will then be mailed a CustomerClaim Form that you will need to complete, provide proof of vehicleownership, sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB. Uponreceipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the ProgramSummary Guidelines.

You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at1–800–955–5100, or writing to:

BBB AUTO LINE4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833

Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any timewithout notice and without obligation.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

218

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (219)

UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM(CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those caseswhere you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and theauthorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concernhave been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartialthird party mediation/arbitration program administered by the CanadianMotor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedyalternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce asettlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legalproceedings.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conducthearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informalenvironment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of theparties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’saward is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.

CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For moreinformation, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP ProvincialAdministrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.

FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLANYou can get more protection for your new car or light truck bypurchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It providesthe following:

• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan youpurchase (such as: reimbursem*nt for rentals; coverage for certainmaintenance and wear items).

• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-BumperWarranty expires.

You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer.There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductiblecombinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. FordESP also offers reimbursem*nt benefits for towing and rental coverage.

When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protectionthroughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network ofmore than 4,600 participating authorized dealers.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

219

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (220)

If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at thetime of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since thisinformation is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer forcomplete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, orvisit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.

GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact theappropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform youof local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knockindex lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regionaloffice or owner relations/customer relationship office.

The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion maydamage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford ofCanada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improperfuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicleback into the U.S.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living inCentral America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearestauthorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write or call:

FORD MOTOR COMPANYFORD EXPORT OPERATIONS1555 Fairlane DriveFairlane Business Park #3Allen Park, Michigan 48101U.S.A.Telephone: (313) 594-4857FAX: (313) 390-0804

If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorizeddealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they candirect you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.

If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside ofthe U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) andnew address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.

Customers in the U.S. should call 1–800–392–3673.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

220

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (221)

ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATEDP.O. Box 07150Detroit, Michigan 48207

Or call:

For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST

Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:www.helminc.com.

(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check ormoney order.)

Obtaining a French owner’s guideFrench Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer orby writing to:Ford Motor Company of Canada, LimitedService Publications CHQ202The Canadian RoadP.O. Box 2000Oakville, ON, CanadaL6J 5E4

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause a crashor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford MotorCompany.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

221

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (222)

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

AdministratorNHTSA400 Seventh Street, SWWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you should immediately inform TransportCanada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Customer Assistance

222

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (223)

WASHING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutralpH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is availablefrom your authorized dealer.• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing

or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot paintedsurfaces.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure tostrong, direct sunlight.

• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water forbest results.

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order toeliminate water spotting.

• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during thewinter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and causedamage to the vehicle.

• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppingsand insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’spaintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42,which is available from your authorized dealer.

• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering acar wash.

• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any paintedsurface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,wash off as soon as possible.

Exterior chrome

• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).

• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from yourauthorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to cleanbumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a fewminutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.

• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic padsas they can scratch the chrome surface.

• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of MotorcraftPremium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmentaleffects.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

223

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (224)

WAXINGApplying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every sixmonths will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.

• Wash the vehicle first.

• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft PremiumLiquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,or an equivalent quality product.

• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roofracks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowlarea. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.

PAINT CHIPSYour authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) toyour authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tarspots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

• Always read the instructions before using the products.

ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERSAluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paintfinish. In order to maintain their shine:

• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brakedust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinsethoroughly with a strong stream of water.

• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims orcovers.

• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on yourwheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaningchemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dustand dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.

• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheelcleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

224

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (225)

ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirtbuildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:

• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. Thehigh-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and causedamage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking theengine block or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all partsthat require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.

• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaningthe engine.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in therunning engine may cause internal damage.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

225

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (226)

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTSUse only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products areavailable from your authorized dealer.• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar

Remover (ZC-42).• For plastic headlamp lenses, use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass

Cleaner (ZC-23).

WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADESThe windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should becleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on thevehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may includehot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellentcoatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminantsmay cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking andsmearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:

• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned witha non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray GlassCleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.

• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol orMotorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid containsspecial solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hotwax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated carwash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appearworn or do not function properly.

• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaneror if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outersurface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or softcloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. Aftercleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. Thewindshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshieldwith water.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean theinside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may causedamage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

226

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (227)

INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENSClean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with aclean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry whitecotton cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner(ZC-38-A) on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion

of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect thedriver from undesirable windshield reflection.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been incontact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntanlotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior paintedsurfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage thefinish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaningthe steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of

the airbag system.

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrumentpanel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.

2. Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11-A) [InCanada use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101)] to the wipedarea and spread around evenly.

3. Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and pressthe cloth onto the soiled area–allow this to set at room temperature for30 minutes.

4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth toclean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth.

INTERIORFor fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with sideairbags:

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional StrengthCarpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

227

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (228)

• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area firstwith Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which canstain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities ofthe seat materials.

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’ssafety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaningthe seat-mounted side airbag (vehicles equipped with

seat-mounted side airbags only). Such products could contaminate theside airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in acollision.

LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over theleather.• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl

Cleaner (ZC-11-A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe

Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D), available from your authorized dealer.• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or

cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-basedleather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing ofthe clear, protective coating.

Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wetclothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, theleather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.

UNDERBODYFlush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body anddoor drain holes free from packed dirt.

FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTSYour Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many qualityproducts available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

228

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (229)

quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill yourautomotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the styleand appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high qualitymaterials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, usethe following products or products of equivalent quality:

Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)

Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)

Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)

Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)

Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)

Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)

Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)

Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11-A)

Motorcraft Leather Care Kit (ZC-11-D)

Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)

Motorcraft Dusting Cloth Mitt (ZC-47)

Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)

Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)

Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)

Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)

Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)

Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)

Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A)

Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)

Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)

Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)

Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)

Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)

Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)

Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Cleaning

229

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (230)

SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS

To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenanceinformation which makes tracking routine service easy.

If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer canprovide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide tofind out which parts and services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service partsconforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built toprovide the best performance in your vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosedspace, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material awayfrom the battery and all fuel related parts.

Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

Working with the engine on

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).

2. Block the wheels.

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burninjuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed

and do not remove it while the engine is running.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

230

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (231)

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hoodrelease handle located under theinstrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andrelease the auxiliary latch that islocated under the front of the hood.

3. Lift the hood until the liftcylinders hold it open.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

231

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (232)

IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

4.6L SOHC V8 engine

1. Brake fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

4. Air filter assembly

5. Power steering fluid reservoir

6. Engine coolant reservoir

7. Battery

8. Power distribution box

9. Engine oil filler cap

10. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

232

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (233)

WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if thelevel is low. In very cold weather, donot fill the reservoir completely.

Only use a washer fluid that meetsFord specification WSB-M8B16-A2.Do not use any special washer fluidsuch as windshield water repellenttype fluid or bug wash. They maycause squeaking, chatter noise,streaking and smearing. Refer to theMaintenance productspecifications and capacities section in this chapter.State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict theuse of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protection without damaging thevehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use

washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result inimpaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washerfluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling systemcomponents.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES1. Pull the wiper blade and armaway from the glass. Turn the bladeas much as possible to gain accessto the lock tab (A). Using a skinnytool, push the lock tab (A) torelease the blade from the arm loopand pull the blade from the arm.

2. Attach the new blade to the armloop and pull it into place until aclick is heard.

Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

233

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (234)

Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and thewindshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaningchapter.

To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended toscrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. Thelayer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of thewiper rubber element.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oilRefer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriateintervals for checking the engine oil.

1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait up to 10 minutes for the oil to drain intothe oil pan.

3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

5. Locate and carefully remove theengine oil level dipstick.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

234

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (235)

6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.

• If the oil level is within thisrange, the oil level is acceptable.DO NOT ADD OIL.

• If the oil level is below thismark, engine oil must be addedto raise the level within thenormal operating range.

• If required, add engine oil to theengine. Refer to Adding engineoil in this chapter.

• Do not overfill the enginewith oil. Oil levels above thismark may cause enginedamage. If the engine isoverfilled, some oil must beremoved from the engine by an authorized dealer.

7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.

Adding engine oil1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engineoil in this chapter.2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add onlycertified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oilfiller cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above thenormal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.

4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.

5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwiseuntil three clicks can be heard.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

235

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (236)

To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the

engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine oil and filter recommendationsLook for this certificationtrademark.

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conformsto the current engine and emission system protection standards and fueleconomy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization andApproval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japaneseautomobile manufacturers.

To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or anequivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A.SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability

performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other enginetreatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage thatis not covered by Ford warranty.

Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedulelisted in scheduled maintenance information.

Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed foradded engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is usedthat does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-upengine noises or knock may be experienced.

It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter oranother with equivalent performance for your engine application.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

236

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (237)

BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with aMotorcraft maintenance-free batterywhich normally does not requireadditional water during its life ofservice.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalledafter the battery has been cleaned or replaced.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean anddry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened tothe battery terminals.If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cablesfrom the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize theacid with a solution of baking soda and water.

It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal bedisconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for anextended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your batteryduring storage.

Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added tothe vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affectbattery performance and durability.

Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can causepersonal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted

substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide properventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on theend walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,

resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on oppositecorners.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

237

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (238)

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuricacid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes

when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing ofacid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flushimmediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead andlead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. Whenthe battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine mustrelearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability andperformance. To begin this process:

1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.

2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start theengine.

3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and withthe A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle forat least one minute.

7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.

• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more torelearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.

• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idlequality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idletrim is eventually relearned.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery isreconnected.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

238

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (239)

• Always dispose of automotivebatteries in a responsible manner.Follow your local authorizedstandards for disposal. Call yourlocal authorized recycling centerto find out more about recyclingautomotive batteries.

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at theintervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolantconcentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentrationtesting is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as theRotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolantshould be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLDFILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, addcoolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.

Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and waterconcentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:

• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).

• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.

• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.

LE

AD

RE

TU

RN

RECYCLE

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

239

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (240)

When the engine is cold, check thelevel of the engine coolant in thereservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir(depending upon application).

• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service intervalschedules.

• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing yourvehicle in this chapter.

If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir islow or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Addingengine coolant in this chapter.

Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use enginecoolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specifiedfunction and vehicle location.

Adding engine coolantWhen adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolantand distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when theengine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

240

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (241)

Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam andscalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you

badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.

Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluidcontainer. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could

make it difficult to see through the windshield.

• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalentmeeting Ford specification WSS-M97B51-A1. Refer toMaintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or anequivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS-M99B37-B6, maydarken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant fromyellow to golden tan.

• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant suchas Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, meeting Fordspecification WSS-M97B44-D, or DEX-COOL� brand with thefactory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange EngineCoolant or any orange-colored extended life product such asDEX-COOL� brand with your factory filled coolant can result indegraded corrosion protection.

• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in caseof emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, thecooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture ofengine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.

• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolantsmixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcoholand other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating orfreezing.

• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. Thesecan be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the enginecoolant.

For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized capon the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recoveryreservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant andwater to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

241

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (242)

coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary toremove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle withan overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine iscool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The

cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come outforcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system byfollowing these steps:

1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.

2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolantpressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.

3. Step back while the pressure releases.

4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use thecloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.

5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (seeabove), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level onthe reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fillthe radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.

6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightlyinstalled to prevent coolant loss.

After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (referto Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust theconcentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50coolant concentration.

Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolantreservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. Ifnecessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant anddistilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.

If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant permonth, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a lowlevel of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible enginedamage.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

242

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (243)

Recycled engine coolantFord Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled enginecoolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium GoldEngine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yetavailable.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriatemanner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recyclingand disposing of automotive fluids.

Coolant refill capacityTo find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, referto Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolantin this section.

Severe climatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):

• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentrationabove 50%.

• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.

• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% willdecrease the overheat protection characteristics of the enginecoolant and may cause engine damage.

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure thecoolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequatefreeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in thewinter months.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentrationabove 40%.

• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% willdecrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the enginecoolant and may cause engine damage.

• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% willdecrease the freeze protection characteristics of the enginecoolant and may cause engine damage.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

243

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (244)

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure thecoolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequateprotection at the temperatures in which you drive.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling systemand engine protection.

What you should know about fail-safe coolingIf the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle tobe driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle loadand terrain.

How fail-safe cooling worksIf the engine begins to overheat:• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area.• The Check Engine indicator light will illuminate.• The message center (if equipped) will display Coolant over

temperature.

• The symbol will illuminate.

If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the enginewill automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabledcylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:

• The engine power will be limited.

• The air conditioning system will be disabled.

Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:

• The engine will completely shut down, causing steering and brakingeffort to increase.

Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Takeyour vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimizeengine damage.

When fail-safe mode is activatedYou have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive thevehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speedoperation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine iscapable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent enginedamage, therefore:

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

244

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (245)

1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.

2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.

3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine isrunning or hot.

5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem

increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL FILTER

For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer toscheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals forchanging the fuel filter.

Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The

customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system

if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tankmay cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap isventing vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops

before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum inthe fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap

to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

245

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (246)

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused ormishandled.

Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is acancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materialsand any open flames beforerefueling your vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmfulor fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highlytoxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel isswallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms areimmediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible forhours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kindcan lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause seriousillness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes andseek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention couldlead to permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel issplashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminatedclothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated orprolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms ofdisulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/orethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. Insensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. Iffuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soapand water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience anadverse reaction.

• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuelblends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

246

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (247)

“Fuel Ethanol ”. To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may beequipped with a yellow fuel cap with the writing “E85/Gasoline”, orcheck if there is a label on the fuel filler door, or check your VIN.When checking the VIN look for the engine type identifier (8thcharacter). If your vehicle is an FFV, then the character will belabeled as a “2.”

Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beerand wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field cornand sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a smallamount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. Theresulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it isdenatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.

During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanolhas a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasolineand this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.

Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and upto 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely coldweather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer toCold Weather Starting in the Driving chapter.

Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metalsand causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down orbecome brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Specialmaterials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehiclesand the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.

Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuelcomponents are not interchangeable. If your vehicle is not

serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures, damagemay occur and your warranty may be invalidated.

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allowsparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while

refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

247

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (248)

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce staticelectricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an

ungrounded fuel container.

Refueling

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severeinjuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:

• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;

• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;

• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;

• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;

• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;

• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up whenfilling an ungrounded fuel container:• Place approved fuel container on the ground.• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the

cargo area).• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while

filling.• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill

position.

Fuel Filler CapYour fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/offfeature.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until itstops.

3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.

4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on thefiller pipe.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

248

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (249)

5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.

If the check fuel cap lamp or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The lamp or messagecan come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled yourvehicle.At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel fillercap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel caplamp or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it maytake several driving cycles for the check fuel cap lamp or “check fuelcap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city andhighway driving.

Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap lamp or “check fuel cap”message on may cause the lamp to turn on as well.

If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel fillercap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty maybe void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if thecorrect genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap isventing vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops

before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum inthe fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap

to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.

FFV (Flex Fuel Vehicle) Fuel CapIf your vehicle is FFV capable it will have a yellow colored fuel cap.

Choosing the right fuelIf your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADEDFUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).

If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only useUNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that areblended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

249

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (250)

The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage yourvehicle.Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metalliccompounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate thatthese additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system todeteriorate more rapidly.Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle wasnot designed may not be covered by your warranty.

Cleaner airFord endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines toimprove air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the RightFuel section.

Octane recommendationsDo not be concerned if your enginesometimes knocks lightly. However,if it knocks heavily under mostdriving conditions while you areusing fuel with the recommendedoctane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.

Unleaded Gasoline EnginesYour vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with an(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolineslabeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower inhigh altitude areas.

FFV engine (if equipped)Your vehicle is designed to use Fuel Ethanol (Ed75–Ed85),“Regular”unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels.

U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with thecommon abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for thatregion. Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may causepowertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and yourwarranty may be invalidated.

Fuel qualityMany of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charterthat recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved

87(R+M)/2 METHOD

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

250

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (251)

performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used whenavailable. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet theWorld-Wide Fuel Charter.Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. Itshould not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fueltank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octanerating. These products have not been approved for your engine andcould cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects ofusing an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Unleaded Gasoline enginesIf you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveabilityproblems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleadedgasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended because itmay cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problemspersist, see your authorized dealer.

FFV engine (if equipped)To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may be equipped with a yellowfuel cap with the writing “E85/Gasoline”, or check if there is a label onthe fuel filler door, or check your VIN. When checking the VIN, look forthe engine type identifier (8th character). If your vehicle is an FFV, thenthe character will be labeled as a “2”.

If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, youshould follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this it isalso recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasolineonce every 3,000 miles (4,828 km). See scheduled maintenanceinformation for more information.

Running out of fuelAvoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverseeffect on powertrain components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times afterrefueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank tothe engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longerthan normal.

• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart theengine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1gallon (3.8L) may be required.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

251

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (252)

• The indicator may come on. For more information on the “checkengine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lightsand chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY

Measuring techniquesYour best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, thedriver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently aspossible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings areNOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommendtaking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a moreaccurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles(3,000 km–5,000 km).

Filling the tankThe advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal tothe rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenanceproduct specifications and capacities section of this chapter.The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and theempty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in theamount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicatesempty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and shouldnot be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling yourvehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not beable to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of thefuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.

For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:

• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.

• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each timethe tank is filled.

• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.

• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.

• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.

• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing thesame direction each time you fill up.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

252

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (253)

• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.

Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.

Calculating fuel economy1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading(in miles or kilometers).

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (ingallons or liters).

3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and recordthe current odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometerreading.

5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fueleconomy:

Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.

Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by totalkilometers traveled.

Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (cityor highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fueleconomy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping recordsduring summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fueleconomy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.

Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habitsGive consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to changea number of variables and improve your fuel economy.

Habits• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.

• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fueleconomy.

• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may wastefuel.

• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.

• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.

• Slow down gradually.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

253

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (254)

• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).

• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if

unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessaryshifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.

• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and mayreduce fuel economy.

• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fueleconomy.

• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.

Maintenance• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel

economy.• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product

specifications and capacities in this chapter.

• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow therecommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checksfound in scheduled maintenance information.

Conditions• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy

at any speed.

• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).

• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bugdeflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) mayreduce fuel economy.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.

• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared todriving on hilly terrain.

• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the topcruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

254

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (255)

• Close windows for high speed driving.

EPA window stickerEvery new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact yourauthorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economycomparisons with other vehicles.It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the windowsticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economymay vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and acatalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply withapplicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalyticconverter and other emission control components continue to workproperly:• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Avoid running out of fuel.• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at

high speeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance informationperformed according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenanceinformation are essential to the life and performance of your vehicleand to its emissions system.

If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used formaintenance replacements or for service of components affectingemission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuineFord Motor Company parts in performance and durability.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dryground cover. The emission system heats up the engine

compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the indicator, charging system warning light or thetemperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss ofengine power could indicate that the emission control system is notworking properly.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

255

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (256)

An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaustto enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaustsystem inspected and repaired immediately.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentiallylethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Bylaw, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are notpermitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or preventit from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is onthe Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune upspecifications.Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warrantyinformation.

On board diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’semission control system. This system is commonly known as the OnBoard Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects theenvironment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meetgovernment emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists yourauthorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When theindicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.Temporary malfunctions may cause the indicator to illuminate.Examples are:1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or runpoorly.

3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel fillercap in this chapter.

4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.

These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tankwith good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting theelectrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or anyother temporary malfunctions present, the indicator should stay offthe next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a coldengine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additionalvehicle service is required.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

256

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (257)

If the indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by theOBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued drivingwith the indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fueleconomy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to morecostly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testingSome state/provincial and local governments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could preventyou from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/Mtest if the indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burnedout), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emissioncontrol systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicleis considered not ready for I/M testing.

If the indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle mayneed to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)description in this chapter.

If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or thebattery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system mayindicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if thevehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON positionfor 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the indicator blinkseight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; ifthe indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready forI/M testing.

The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control systemduring normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consistingof mixed city and highway driving may be performed:

15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting theengine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. Theengine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. Ifthe vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle willhave to be repeated.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

257

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (258)

POWER STEERING FLUIDCheck the power steering fluid.Refer to scheduled maintenanceinformation for the service intervalschedules.

1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operatingtemperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will benear the center of the normal area between H and C).

2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right severaltimes.

3. Turn the engine off.

4. Check the fluid level in thereservoir. It should be between theMIN and MAX lines. Do not addfluid if the level is in this range.

5. If the fluid is low, add fluid insmall amounts, continuouslychecking the level until it reachesthe range between the MIN andMAX lines. Be sure to put the capback on the reservoir. Refer toMaintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter forthe proper fluid type.

BRAKE FLUID

The fluid level will drop slowly asthe brakes wear, and will rise whenthe brake components are replaced.Fluid levels below the “MAX” linethat do not trigger the brake systemwarning lamp are within the normaloperating range, there is no need toadd fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,

DO NOT

OVERFILL

PO

W

ERSTEERING FLUID

MAXMIN

MAX

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

258

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (259)

the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seekservice from your authorized dealer immediately.

TRANSMISSION FLUID

Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)

Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduledintervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does notconsume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if thetransmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips orshifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.

Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain anaccurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operatingtemperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has beenoperated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hotweather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.

1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operatingtemperature.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.

3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gearranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.

4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.

5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. Ifnecessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartmentin this chapter for the location of the dipstick.

6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.

7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be inthe designated area for normal operating temperature or ambienttemperature.

Low fluid levelDo not drive the vehicle if the fluidlevel is at the bottom of the dipstickand the ambient temperature isabove 50°F (10°C).

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

259

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (260)

Correct fluid level

The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operatingtemperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normaloperating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles(30 km) of driving.

You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature isabove 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfillcondition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operatingtemperature.

The transmission fluid should be inthis range if at normal operatingtemperature (150°F-170°F[66°C-77°C]).

The transmission fluid should be inthis range if at ambient temperature(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).

High fluid levelFluid levels above the safe rangemay result in transmission failure.An overfill condition of transmissionfluid may cause shift and/orengagement concerns and/orpossible damage.

High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.

Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels

Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type offluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenanceproduct specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may causeinternal transmission component damage.

If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the fillertube until the level is correct.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

260

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (261)

If an overfill occurs, excess fluidshould be removed by an authorizeddealer.

An overfill condition oftransmission fluid may causeshift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments orcleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmissionoperation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

AIR FILTERRefer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriateintervals for changing the air filter element.When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filterelement listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burninjuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed

and do not remove it while the engine is running.

Changing the air filter element1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.

2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.

3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.

4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt ordebris and to ensure good sealing.

5. Install a new air filter element. Becareful not to crimp the filterelement edges between the air filterhousing and cover. This could causefilter damage and allow unfilteredair to enter the engine if notproperly seated.

6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.

7. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

261

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (262)

Note: Be sure the hinge features of the air filter cover to the air filterhousing are fully engaged when reassembling the air filter assembly.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severeengine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage tothe engine if the correct air filter element is not used.

MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS

Component 4.6L SOHC V8

engine

4.6L FFV SOHC V8

engine

Air filter element FA-1032 FA-1032Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986BBattery-standard BXT-65–650 BXT-65–650Battery-heavy duty BXT-65–750 BXT-65–750Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-SPCV valve 1 1

Spark plugs 2 2

1The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the itemslisted in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to thelife and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.

For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer toscheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals forchanging the PCV valve.

Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material anddesign specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft orequivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be voidfor any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is notused.2For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer toscheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals forchanging the spark plugs.

Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material anddesign specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft orequivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may bevoid for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are notused.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

262

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (263)

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

PR

OD

UC

TS

PE

CIF

ICA

TIO

NS

AN

DC

AP

AC

ITIE

S

Item

Cap

acit

yF

ord

part

nam

eF

ord

part

nu

mb

er

/

Fo

rd

sp

ecif

icati

on

Bra

kefl

uid

Bet

wee

nM

INan

dM

AX

onre

serv

oir

Mot

orcr

aft

Hig

hP

erfo

rman

ceD

OT

3M

otor

Veh

icle

Bra

keF

luid

PM

-1-C

/W

SS-M

6C62

-A

Doo

rw

eath

erst

rips

—Si

licon

eSp

ray

Lub

rica

ntX

L-6

/E

SR-M

13P

4-A

Eng

ine

cool

ant

18.6

quar

ts(1

7.6L

)

Mot

orcr

aft

Pre

miu

mG

old

Eng

ine

Coo

lant

wit

hbi

tter

ing

agen

t(y

ello

w-c

olor

ed)1

VC

-7-B

/W

SS-M

97B

51-A

1

Coo

ling

syst

emst

ople

akpe

llets

—M

otor

craf

tC

oolin

gSy

stem

Stop

Lea

kP

elle

tsV

C-6

/W

SS-M

99B

37-B

6

Eng

ine

oil2

6.0

quar

ts(5

.7L

)

Mot

orcr

aft

SAE

5W-2

0P

rem

ium

Synt

heti

cB

lend

Mot

orO

il(U

S)M

otor

craf

tSA

E5W

-20

Supe

rP

rem

ium

Mot

orO

il(C

anad

a)

XO

-5W

20-Q

SP(U

S)C

XO

-5W

20-L

SP12

(Can

ada)

/W

SS-M

2C93

0-A

wit

hA

PI

Cer

tifi

cati

onM

ark

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

263

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (264)

Item

Cap

acit

yF

ord

part

nam

eF

ord

part

nu

mb

er

/

Fo

rd

sp

ecif

icati

on

Hin

ges,

latc

hes,

stri

ker

plat

es,

fuel

fille

rdo

orhi

nge

and

seat

trac

ks—

Mul

ti-P

urpo

seG

reas

eX

G-4

orX

L-5

/E

SB-M

1C93

-B

Loc

kcy

linde

rs—

Mot

orcr

aft

Pen

etra

ting

and

Loc

kL

ubri

cant

XL

-1/

Non

e

Pow

erst

eeri

ngfl

uid

Fill

tolin

eon

rese

rvoi

rM

otor

craf

tM

ER

CO

N�

VA

TF

XT-

5-Q

M/

ME

RC

ON

�V

Aut

omat

ictr

ansm

issi

onfl

uid

(4R

75E

)13

.9qu

arts

(13.

2L)3

Mot

orcr

aft

ME

RC

ON

�V

AT

F4

XT-

5-Q

M/

ME

RC

ON

�V

Rea

rax

lefl

uid5

5.0

pint

s(2

.4L

)6M

otor

craf

tSA

E80

W-9

0P

rem

ium

Rea

rA

xle

Lub

rica

nt

XY-

80W

90-Q

L/

WSP

-M2C

197-

A

Win

dshi

eld

was

her

flui

dF

illto

line

onre

serv

oir

Mot

orcr

aft

Pre

miu

mW

inds

hiel

dW

ashe

rC

once

ntra

te

ZC

-32-

A/

WSB

-M8B

16-A

2

Fue

lT

ank

19.0

gallo

ns(7

1.9L

)—

1A

ddth

eco

olan

tty

peor

igin

ally

equi

pped

inyo

urve

hicl

e.2U

seof

synt

heti

cor

synt

heti

cbl

end

mot

oroi

lis

not

man

dato

ry.

Eng

ine

oil

need

only

mee

tth

ere

quir

emen

tsof

For

dsp

ecif

icat

ion

WSS

-M2C

930-

Aan

dth

eA

PI

Cer

tifi

cati

onm

ark.

3In

dica

tes

only

appr

oxim

ate

dry-

fill

capa

city

.So

me

appl

icat

ions

may

vary

base

don

cool

ersi

zean

dif

equi

pped

wit

han

in-t

ank

cool

er.

The

amou

ntof

tran

smis

sion

flui

dan

dfl

uid

leve

lsh

ould

bese

tby

the

indi

cati

onon

the

dips

tick

’sno

rmal

oper

atin

gra

nge.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

264

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (265)

4A

utom

atic

tran

smis

sion

sth

atre

quir

eM

ER

CO

N�

Vsh

ould

only

use

ME

RC

ON

�V

flui

dor

flui

dth

atis

spec

ifie

ddu

alus

age

ME

RC

ON

�/M

ER

CO

N�

V.R

efer

tosch

ed

ule

dm

ain

ten

an

ce

info

rm

ati

on

tode

term

ine

the

corr

ect

serv

ice

inte

rval

.U

seof

any

flui

dot

her

than

the

reco

mm

ende

dfl

uid

may

caus

etr

ansm

issi

onda

mag

e.5R

ear

axle

sar

eco

nsid

ered

lubr

icat

edfo

rlif

ew

hen

the

vehi

cle

isus

edfo

rno

rmal

serv

ice.

For

seve

redu

tyre

quir

emen

ts,

see

Ex

cep

tion

sa

nd

/or

Sp

ecia

lO

pera

tin

gC

on

dit

ion

sin

sch

ed

ule

dm

ain

ten

an

ce

info

rm

ati

on

.A

dd4

oz.

(118

ml)

ofA

ddit

ive

Fri

ctio

nM

odif

ier

XL

-3or

equi

vale

ntm

eeti

ngF

ord

spec

ific

atio

nE

ST-M

2C11

8-A

for

com

plet

ere

fill

ofT

ract

ion-

Lok

rear

axle

s.6Se

rvic

ere

fill

capa

citi

esar

ede

term

ined

byfi

lling

the

rear

axle

1/4

inch

to9/

16in

ch(6

mm

to14

mm

)be

low

the

bott

omof

the

fille

rho

le.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

265

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (266)

ENGINE DATA

Engine 4.6L V8 engine 4.6L FFV V8 engine

Cubic inches 281 281Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane or Ethanol

(E 85)Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plugSpark plug gap 0.052–0.056 inch

(1.32–1.42 mm)0.041–0.047 inch(1.04–1.20 mm)

Compression ratio 9.4:1 9.4:1

Engine drivebelt routing

• 4.6L V8 Engine

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

266

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (267)

IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Compliance Certification LabelThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations requirethat a Safety ComplianceCertification Label be affixed to avehicle and prescribe where theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel may be located. The SafetyCompliance Certification Label islocated on the structure (B-Pillar)by the trailing edge of the driver’sdoor or the edge of the driver’sdoor.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)The vehicle identification number islocated on the driver sideinstrument panel.

Please note that in the graphic,XXXX is representative of yourvehicle identification number.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

267

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (268)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the followinginformation:

1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake system / Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) / RestraintSystem

3. Vehicle line, series, body type

4. Engine type

5. Check digit

6. Model year

7. Assembly plant

8. Production sequence number

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONSYou can find atransmission/transaxle code on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel. The following table tells youwhich transmission or transaxleeach code represents.

Description Code

Four-speed automatic overdrive (4R75E) Q

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

268

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (269)

GENUINE MERCURY ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLEA wide selection of Genuine Mercury Accessories are available for yourvehicle through your local Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer. Thesequality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill yourautomotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the styleand aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessoryis made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Mercury’srigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company willrepair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine MercuryAccessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials orworkmanship during the warranty period, as well as any componentdamaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warrantedfor whichever provides you the greatest benefit:

• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or

• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.

Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.

Following is a list of several Genuine Mercury Accessories. Not allaccessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories areavailable for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our onlinestore at: www.mercuryaccessories.com.

Exterior styleSide window deflectors

Splash guards

Spoiler

Interior styleElectrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors

Floor mats

LifestyleCargo organization and management

Peace of mindRemote start

Vehicle security systems

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Accessories

269

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (270)

For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information inmind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:

• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or ofthe front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the SafetyCompliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer forspecific weight information.

• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobilecommunications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones andtheft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any suchequipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTCregulations and should be installed only by a qualified servicetechnician.

• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of yourvehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotiveuse.

• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lockbraking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennasonto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas inthe area of the driver’s side hood.

• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added tothe vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affectbattery performance and durability.

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Accessories

270

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (271)

A

ABS (see Brakes) .....................179

Air cleaner filter ...............261–262

Air conditioning ..........................35

Air suspension ...........................184description ..............................184

Airbag supplemental restraintsystem ................................120, 129

and child safety seats ............122description ......................120, 129disposal ....................................132driver airbag ....................122, 130indicator light .................129, 131operation .........................122, 130passenger airbag .............122, 130side airbag ...............................129

Antifreeze(see Engine coolant) ................239

Anti-lock brake system(see Brakes) ......................179–180

Anti-theft system ..................94, 98arming the system ....................99disarming a triggeredsystem .......................................99

Audio system(see Radio) ................18, 20, 23, 28

Automatic transmissiondriving an automaticoverdrive .................................187fluid, adding ............................259fluid, checking ........................259fluid, refill capacities ..............263fluid, specification ..................263

Auxiliary power point .................61

Axlelubricant specifications ..........263refill capacities ........................263

traction lok ..............................185

B

Battery .......................................237acid, treating emergencies .....237jumping a disabled battery ....208maintenance-free ....................237replacement, specifications ...262servicing ..................................237

Belt-Minder� .............................115

Booster seats .............................133

Brakes ................................178–179anti-lock ...........................179–180anti-lock brake system (ABS)warning light ...........................180fluid, checking and adding ....258fluid, refill capacities ..............263fluid, specifications .................263lubricant specifications ..........263shift interlock ..................185–186

Bulbs ............................................44

C

Capacities for refilling fluids ....263

Cell phone use ..............................7

Child safety restraints ..............132child safety belts ....................132

Child safety seats ......................136attaching with tether straps ..140in front seat ............................137in rear seat ..............................137

Child safety seats - boosterseats ...........................................133

Cleaning your vehicleengine compartment ..............225instrument panel ....................227interior .....................................227

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

271

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (272)

plastic parts ............................226washing ....................................223waxing .....................................224wheels ......................................224wiper blades ............................226

Climate control (see Airconditioning or Heating) ............35

Clock adjust6-CD in dash .............................31AM/FM .......................................19AM/FM/CD .................................22AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................26

Compass, electronicset zone adjustment .................54

Console ........................................52overhead ..............................52–53

Controlspower seat ...............................102steering column ........................68

Coolantchecking and adding ..............239refill capacities ................243, 263specifications ..........................263

Cruise control(see Speed control) ....................65

Cupholder(s) .............................105

Customer Assistance ................191Ford Extended ServicePlan ..........................................219Getting assistance outside theU.S. and Canada .....................220Getting roadside assistance ...191Getting the serviceyou need .................................215Ordering additional owner’sliterature .................................221Utilizing theMediation/ArbitrationProgram ...................................219

D

Daytime running lamps(see Lamps) ................................39Defrost

rear window ..............................37Dipstick

automatic transmissionfluid ..........................................259engine oil .................................234

Driving under specialconditions ..................................189

through water .........................190

E

Electronic message center .........74Emergencies, roadside

jump-starting ..........................208

Emission control system ..........255

Engine ........................................266cleaning ...................................225coolant .....................................239fail-safe cooling .......................244idle speed control ...................237lubrication specifications .......263refill capacities ........................263service points ..........................232starting after a collision .........193

Engine block heater .................177

Engine oil ..................................234change oil soon warning,message center .......................234checking and adding ..............234dipstick ....................................234filter, specifications ........236, 262recommendations ...................236refill capacities ........................263specifications ..........................263

Event data recording ....................6

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

272

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (273)

Exhaust fumes ..........................176

F

Fail safe cooling ........................244Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....245Floor mats ...................................82Fluid capacities .........................263Foglamps .....................................39Fuel ............................................245

calculating fueleconomy ......................56, 76, 252cap ...........................................248capacity ...................................263choosing the right fuel ...........249comparisons with EPA fueleconomy estimates .................255detergent in fuel .....................250filling your vehiclewith fuel ..................245, 248, 252filter, specifications ........245, 262fuel pump shut-off switch .....193improving fuel economy ........252octane rating ...................250, 266quality ..............................250–251running out of fuel .................251safety information relating toautomotive fuels .....................245

Fuel - flex fuel vehicle(FFV) .........................245, 249–250Fuses ..................................194–195

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............248Gas mileage(see Fuel economy) .................252Gauges .........................................15

H

Hazard flashers .........................192

Head restraints .........................100Headlamps ...................................38

aiming ........................................40autolamp system .......................38bulb specifications ....................44daytime running lights .............39flash to pass ..............................39high beam .................................39replacing bulbs .........................45turning on and off ....................38

Heatingheating and air conditioningsystem .................................34–35

Homelink wireless controlsystem ..........................................70

Hood ..........................................231

I

Ignition ...............................173, 266

Illuminated visor mirror .............51

Infant seats(see Safety seats) .....................136

Inspection/maintenance (I/M)testing ........................................257

Instrument panelcleaning ...................................227cluster ........................................10lighting up paneland interior ...............................40

J

Jump-starting your vehicle ......208

K

Keyless entry system .................92autolock .....................................85keypad .......................................92

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

273

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (274)

programming entry code .........92Keys .......................................84, 97

positions of the ignition .........173

L

Lampsautolamp system .......................38bulb replacementspecifications chart ..................44daytime running light ...............39fog lamps ...................................39headlamps .................................38headlamps, flash to pass ..........39instrument panel, dimming .....40interior lamps .....................42–45replacing bulbs .........................45

Lane change indicator(see Turn signal) ........................42

Lights, warning and indicator ....10anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........180

Limited slip axle(see Traction Loc) ....................185

Load limits .................................163

Locksautolock .....................................85childproof ..................................86doors ..........................................84

Lubricant specifications ...........263

Lug nuts ....................................207

Lumbar support, seats .............104

M

Message center ...........................74english/metric button ...............78system check button ................77warning messages .....................79

Mirrors ...................................63–64

automatic dimming rearviewmirror ........................................63fold away ...................................64heated ........................................64side view mirrors (power) .......64

Moon roof ....................................69Motorcraft parts ........228, 245, 262

O

Octane rating ............................250

Oil (see Engine oil) ..................234

P

Parking brake ............................180

Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....262

Passenger OccupantClassification Sensor .................107

Pedals (see Power adjustablefoot pedals) .................................65

Power adjustable foot pedals .....65

Power distribution box(see Fuses) ...............................198

Power door locks ..................84–85

Power mirrors .............................64

Power point .................................61

Power steering ..................183–184fluid, checking and adding ....258fluid, refill capacity ................263

Power Windows ...........................62

R

Radio ..........................18, 20, 23, 28

Rear window defroster ...............37

Relays ................................194, 201

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

274

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (275)

Remote entry system ...........88, 92illuminated entry ......................91locking/unlocking doors ...........88opening the trunk .....................89panic alarm ...............................89replacement/additionaltransmitters ...............................90replacing the batteries .............89

Roadside assistance ..................191

S

Safety Belt Maintenance ..........114

Safety belts (see Safetyrestraints) ..................105, 109–114

Safety defects,reporting ............................221–222

Safety restraints ........105, 109–114Belt-Minder� ...........................115extension assembly ................113for adults .........................110–113for children .............................132lap belt ....................................111Occupant ClassificationSensor ......................................107safety belt maintenance .........114warning light and chime ........115

Safety seats for children ..........136

Safety ComplianceCertification Label ....................267

Seats ..........................................100child safety seats ....................136front seats ...............................100

SecuriLock passive anti-theftsystem ....................................94, 97

Servicing your vehicle ..............230

Setting the clockAM/FM single CD .....................22AM/FM stereo ...........................19

AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................31AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................26

Spark plugs,specifications .....................262, 266Specification chart,lubricants ...................................263Speed control ..............................65Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......175Starting your vehicle ........173–175

jump starting ..........................208

Steeringspeed sensitive .......................184

Steering wheelcontrols ......................................68tilting .........................................51

T

Tilt steering wheel ......................51

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)

Tires, Wheels and Loading ....158

Tires ...................................143–144alignment ................................151care ..........................................147changing ..................................205checking the pressure ............147inflating ...................................145label .........................................157replacing ..................................149rotating ....................................151safety practices .......................150sidewall information ...............152snow tires and chains ............163spare tire .........................202–203terminology .............................144tire grades ...............................144treadwear ........................143, 148

Towing .......................................169

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

275

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (276)

recreational towing .................172trailer towing ..........................169wrecker ....................................214

Traction control ........................181

Traction-lok rear axle ...............185

Transmission .............................185brake-shift interlock(BSI) ................................185–186fluid, checking and adding(automatic) .............................259fluid, refill capacities ..............263lubricant specifications ..........263

Trunk ...........................................87remote release ....................83, 89

Turn signal ..................................42

V

Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) ..........................................267Vehicle loading ..........................163Ventilating your vehicle ...........176

W

Warning lights (see Lights) .......10Washer fluid ..............................233Water, Driving through .............190Windows

power .........................................62Windshield washer fluid andwipers ..........................................50

checking and adding fluid .....233replacing wiper blades ...........233

Wrecker towing .........................214

2008 Grand Marquis (grn)Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)USA (fus)

Index

276

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (277)

277

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (278)

278

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (279)

279

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (280)

280

Mercury Grand Marquis Owners Manual - [PDF Document] (2024)
Top Articles
Latest Posts
Article information

Author: Moshe Kshlerin

Last Updated:

Views: 5630

Rating: 4.7 / 5 (57 voted)

Reviews: 80% of readers found this page helpful

Author information

Name: Moshe Kshlerin

Birthday: 1994-01-25

Address: Suite 609 315 Lupita Unions, Ronnieburgh, MI 62697

Phone: +2424755286529

Job: District Education Designer

Hobby: Yoga, Gunsmithing, Singing, 3D printing, Nordic skating, Soapmaking, Juggling

Introduction: My name is Moshe Kshlerin, I am a gleaming, attractive, outstanding, pleasant, delightful, outstanding, famous person who loves writing and wants to share my knowledge and understanding with you.